Home

Paradyne 9720 User's Manual

1. Pin 13 Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 13 P1 Pin Pin P2 Chassis Ground 1 1 Chassis Ground TXD 2 2 TXD RXD 3 3 RXD RTS 4 4 RTS 5 5 DSR 6 6 DSR Signal Ground 7 7 Signal Ground CD RLSD 8 8 CD RLSD RXC RXC DTR DTR XTXC XTXC 496 15180 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DB9 to DB25 Crossover Cable 9700 A2 GB20 20 A standard crossover cable can be used to connect the Model 9720 or 9788 COM port to an external modem The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver CSU DSU See Ethernet Port Connector on page E 6 to configure an external modem This does not apply to the router Signal Ground CTS Pin 6 P1 Pin 1 Pini Plug Plug Pin 14 S Ll I Pin 5 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 13 P1 Pin Pin P2 1 1 RXD 2 2 TXD TXD 3 3 RXD DTR 4 4 RTS Signal Ground 5 5 DSR 6 6 DSR 7 7 8 8 9 DTR 01 16989 December 2002 E 13 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E 14 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Technical Specifications 9700 A2 GB20 20 Technical specifications for the FrameSaver DSL CSU DSUs and routers are the same except that the routers do not have a data port Table F 1 FrameSaver DSL Technical Specifications 1 of 2 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 ICES 003 CISPR 22 Safety Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s label for safety infor
2. 0600 eee 3 3 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 4 Changing Configuration Options 0000 eae 3 5 Saving Configuration Options 000 cee eee eee 3 5 4 Configuration Options ii Using the Easy Install Feature 20 0 eee 4 3 Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock 4 8 Changing the Operating Mode 0 00000 cee eee eee 4 8 Configuration Option Tables 0 0000 cece eee 4 9 Configuring the Overall System 00 0000 eee eee 4 10 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the CSU DSU 4 10 Configuring Class of Service Definitions 4 13 Code Point Definitions 0000 cee eee 4 15 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 4 16 Configuring General System Options 000 4 19 Configuring Network Interfaces 000 0c eee eee 4 20 Configuring the Network Physical Interface 4 20 Configuring Frame Relay for the Network Interface 4 23 Configuring DLC Records for the Network Interface 9720 4 23 Configuring Circuit Records for the Network Interface 9783 9788 4 24 Configuring ATM for the Network Interface 9783 9788 4 27 Configuring the User Data or Virtual Router Port 4 28 Configuring the CSU DSU s Data Port Physical Interface 4 28 Configuring Frame Relay on the CSU DSU s Data Port
3. Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity next option Disable Does not timeout and disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is ended Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port This option is only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can view or edit The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than 223 Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zero
4. 0 000 cece 7 24 Network Interface Status 0 0000 e eee eee 7 26 IP Routing Table Management Traffic 000000 7 27 Performance Statistics 6 0 0 0 cee eee 7 29 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 7 30 DLCI Performance Statistics 00 000 e eee eee 7 34 Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 7 35 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 0 00 7 36 ATM Performance Statistics 9783 9788 04 7 38 VCC Performance Statistics 9783 9788 04 7 39 SHDSL Line Performance Statistics 9788 7 40 Ethernet Performance Statistics 00000 eens 7 41 Clearing Performance Statistics 0 0000c eae 7 42 Trap Event Log 005 EE tees 7 43 FIP File Transfers e o ac ec a eke ede nee a a a E a 7 44 Initiating an FTP Session 00 0c e eee eee 7 45 Upgrading System Software 0000 eee eee 7 46 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed 7 47 Activating Software 0 0 000 cece eee 7 47 Transferring Collected Data 0 00000 eee 7 48 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Problem Indicators 3 vec wert ev aunts each vie ate cae eed Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring
5. For ID 1 Default Specifies a name to identify a Class of Service definition ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the definition maximum length 8 characters Measure Latency amp Availability Possible Settings N Y Default Setting For IDs 2 7 N ForID 1 Y Determines whether latency and availability are measured for this Class of Service ID Display Conditions This option is set to N and is read only until the class of service is defined and code points are assigned to it N Latency and availability are not measured for this Class of Service ID Y Latency and availability are measured for this Class of Service ID Code Points Assigned Possible Settings Y N Default Setting For IDs 2 7 N ForID 1 Y This read only field shows whether a Code Point has been assigned to this Class of Service ID on the Code Point Definitions screen N No Code Point is assigned to this ID Y At least one Code Point is assigned to this ID December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Code Point Definitions 9700 A2 GB20 20 Select Class of Service Definitions from the System menu then PgDn or PgUp to display or change the Code Point definitions for a Class of Service ID See Configuring Class of Service Definitions on page 4 13 for instructions Table 4 4 Code Point Definitions Code Pnt Possible Settings 000000 111111 Default
6. The number of configuration commands that can be entered without performing a save is limited a warning message is generated The only show command available is show configuration terminal Enter configuration mode and a copy of the currently running configuration is loaded into the edit buffer Any changes made in the buffer overwrite the copied current configuration when the save command is entered the configuration is saved to the currently running configuration terminal and an automatic reset is performed factory Enter configuration mode and a copy of the factory default settings is loaded into the edit buffer Any changes made in the buffer overwrite the copied default settings when the save command is entered the configuration is saved to the currently running configuration terminal and an automatic reset is performed This is the default save Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode All config modes Causes configuration changes to be saved to the currently active configuration and the router to be reset If the save command is entered and changes made require a reboot of the device a prompt states that a reset is required for the changes to take effect If yes is entered changes are stored and the device resets automatically A message displays when the save is complete f no is entered you stay in configuration mode C 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Rou
7. AutoRate The unit automatically detects the line rate from the network interface Fixed The unit uses the line rate specified by DSL Line Rate DSL Line Rate Kbps Possible Settings If DSLAM Type is set to Paradyne or if DSLAM Type is set to Nokia and Line Rate Mode is set to Fixed 144 192 208 256 272 384 400 512 528 768 784 1024 1152 1168 1536 1552 2320 If DSLAM Type is set to Alcatel NewBridge 208 400 784 1168 1552 2320 If DSLAM Type is set to Nokia and Line Rate Mode is set to Hunt 192 384 768 1152 1536 If DSLAM Type is set to PairGain 144 192 208 256 272 384 400 512 528 768 784 1024 1152 1168 1536 1552 2320 Default Setting If DSLAM Type is set to Alcatel NewBridge and Line Rate Mode is set to Hunt 208 If DSLAM Type is set to Nokia and Line Rate Mode is set to Hunt 384 If DSLAM Type is set to PairGain and Line Rate Mode is set to Fixed 784 If DSLAM Type is set to Paradyne Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate and DSL Line Rate does not appear Determines the rate on the DSL network interface if Line Rate Mode is Fixed or the rate the device will first use to attempt to train if Line Rate Mode is Hunt Display Conditions DSL Line Rate does not appear if DSL Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate 144 2320 The DSL line rate is set to the specified rate in Kbps SNR Margin Alarm Threshold dB Possible
8. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults m OID Cross References on page B 19 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 B 1 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported m MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 m EtherLike MIB RFC 2665 m RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 m RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com B gt Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 From the Paradyne World Wide Web site select Support Online Technical Support 2 Under Technical Information select MIBs 3 Select FrameSaver Frame Relay Devices 4 Select the desired MIB The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to your browser or OpenLane NMS instructions for additional download information B 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the System Group for the FrameSaver DSL device which
9. Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 6 9 6 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses An additional level of security is provided by m Limiting the NMS IP addresses that can access the FrameSaver unit m SNMP Management System IP address validation m Specifying the access level allowed at the time IP address validation is performed Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP management configuration options The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on an IP address when unit communications attempts are being made p gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Select the SNMP NMS Security option Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Ena
10. Specifies to match any source host A source ip of 0 0 0 0 and a source wildcard of 255 255 255 255 are specified host Specify a single host source address to match source host ip The source host IP address to match Continued on next page December 2002 C 19 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 20 Table C 11 Filter Commands 2 of 4 Continued from previous page For Extended IP Access Lists Example access list 100 permit tcp 10 1 1 1 0 0 0 255 20 1 1 1 0 0 0 255 protocol The IP protocol to which the filter will be applied The following protocols are supported ip Filter applies to all IP packets including but not limited to ICMP TCP and UDP icmp Internet Control Message Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol source ip The source IP Address to match source wildcard Specifies a 32 bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the source IP Address to ignore during matches This argument must be supplied when a source ip address is specified any Match any source host A source ip of 0 0 0 0 and a source wildcard of 255 255 255 255 are specified host Specify a single host source address to match source host ip The source host IP address to match dest ip The destination IP Address to match dest wildcard Specifies a 32 bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the destina
11. The FrameSaver unit uses its own internal clock the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Monitor RTS Control Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies if the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port are used to determine when valid data communication with the DTE is possible When the RTS off condition is detected CTS is deasserted LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid DTE data communication is possible Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the DTR off condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable
12. The sections that follow describe what you need to do to get Activation Certificate information into your OpenLane SLM system and to activate Advanced SLM capability in units with the Diagnostic Feature Set December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Entering an Activation Certificate Once you receive an Activation Certificate enter the Activation Certificate number into your OpenLane SLM system s database B gt Procedure To enter the Activation Certificate number 1 Open the OpenLane SLM application and provide your access level which must be Admin 2 Select Firmware Feature Maintenance from the OpenLane Administration screen 3 In the Feature Activations area select View Add activation certificates located near the bottom of the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu 4 If no Activation Certificates have been entered into the system or if adding another certificate Click inside the New certificate box under Add certificate Enter the Activation Certificate number from the certificate Click on the prompt below it The frame at the bottom of the screen is refreshed to display information about the new certificate See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information Checking Activation Certificate Status You can view the status of certificates and activations at any time by selecting View Add activation certificates from the Firmware Feature M
13. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 7 11 IP Routing Table Values is sorted by Destination IP address from the lowest number to the highest If no routes exist the No Routes message appears instead of IP routing information 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 27 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 28 Table 7 11 IP Routing Table Values Field What It Indicates Destination The Destination IP Address for the route 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Mask The Destination Subnet Mask for the route m 000 000 000 000 225 255 255 255 for network routes m FFEFFF FFF FFF for host routes m 127 may also appear this is a reserved number Gateway The Gateway IP Address for the route 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Hop The number of hops in the route to the destination 1 15 If 16 appears the route is in the process of being aged out Type The method used to add the route to the table m ICM The route was added because an Internet Control Management Protocol ICMP redirect message was received from a router indicating a better route to the destination m Loc The route was added due to the FrameSaver units local configuration a Default IP Address or an SNMP Manager Initial Route Destination have been configured The route remains until the unit s configuration changes m NMS The route was added by a Network Management System using SNMP The route remains until there is a powe
14. Advanced SLM Feature Set The following additional features are provided with the Advanced SLM Feature set TruePut Technology Using FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio throughput within and above CIR between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be precisely measured eliminating averaging inaccuracies Intelligent Service Level Verification SLV Provides accurate throughput latency and availability measurements to determine network performance and whether SLAs Service Level Agreements are being met along with SLA reporting RMON Alarms and Configurable Alarm Thresholds Using the OpenLane system provides the ability to change the SLA parameters and the RMON alarm thresholds to correct problems in real time before the SLA is violated RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything needed to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability Continuous roundtrip latency testing and reporting as well as CIR relationship to transmitted and received data performance statistics are included In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links for accurate calculation of utilization FTP User History Poller The OpenLane system provides a user history bulk collector that generates a database for graphical and historical reporting December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices m Network
15. If the DLCI is configured on a Virtual Channel Connection VCC the VPI 0 15 and VCI 32 255 are displayed next to the DLCI Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to Use_Internal_Route 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI Source IP Address Available Settings Automatic Special Default Setting Automatic Specifies the source IP address to be identified with the ping Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Destination Interface is set to Use_Internal_Route Automatic The source IP address is The interface IP address if one exists else The node IP address if one exists else The first available address in the address table Special The entered IP address is shown as the source When Special is specified and additional field is displayed that allows you to enter an IP address 000 000 000 001 126 255 255 255 or 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 December 2002 8 25 8 Troubleshooting 8 26 Table 8 5 Ping Options 2 of 2 Encapsulation Available Settings Routed Default Setting Routed Specifies the IP encapsulation used by the data stream This read only field specifies that the IP encapsulation used is RFC 1490 RFC 2427 routed Network Level Protocol IDentifier NLPID encapsulation and not SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP encapsulation Display Conditions This setting does not appear when Des
16. Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Display Conditions The Port 1 setting does not appear if the PVC is Payload Managed or IP Enabled Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network frame relay link interface be used in the connection Port 1 For the FrameSaver CSU DSU specifies that the user data port frame relay link be used in the connection Rtr SO For the FrameSaver router specifies that the router s virtual Serial port 0 interface SO be used in the connection Net1 ATM Specifies that the network ATM link be used in the connection Clear Clears the link field and suppresses the EDLCI field for a multiplexed DLCI Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e have a DLCI record and must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 43 4 Co
17. The amount of increased noise the system can tolerate on the DSL network interface without exceeding a Bit Error Rate of 107 Disconnected The line is disconnected Receiver Attenuation 0 255 in The Loop Attenuation Threshold value as Threshold 1 dB increments defined in ITU 991 2 9788 only SNR Margin 0 15 dB in 1 dB The SNR Margin Threshold as defined in Threshold increments ITU 991 2 9788 only 7 26 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance IP Routing Table Management Traffic Use the IP Routing Table for Management Traffic to see all management traffic IP routes configured in the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Status IP Routing Table Management Traffic IP Routing Table Screen Example main status ip_route 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 2 26 2001 06 05 Page 1 of 2 IP ROUTING TABLE fOR MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC Destination Mask Gateway Hop Type Interface 135 001 001 000 255 255 255 026 001 254 Tmp PVCMgmt 1001 135 001 002 111 FFF EEE FFF 026 001 254 NMS PVCMgmt 1002 135 001 220 000 255 255 255 042 001 254 Ethernet 135 001 221 000 255 255 255 042 001 254 COM 135 001 220 000 255 255 255 042 001 254 COM 135 001 222 111 255 255 255 026 001 254 Ethernet 135 001 222 113 255 255 255 026 001 254 PVCMgmt 1003 135 001 002 111 255 255 255 026 001 254 PVCMgmt 1004 135 001 002 111 255 255 255 026 001 254 PVCMgmt 1005 135 026 002 036 255 255 255 000 000 000 Ethernet
18. enterpriseDLCI Up 12 devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib The DLCI has been deleted The network no longer supports the DLCI and it was removed String ifString deleted by Auto DLCI delete DLCI Status is set to Inactive the DLCI is down Strings ifString down Due to LMI or physical failure ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String ifString up enterpriseLatency Exceeded 21 iflndex RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib An IP SLY latency threshold has been exceeded for a particular Class of Service for a path String Latency exceeded XXX XXX XXX XXX COS nn DLCI nnnr December 2002 B 11 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseLatency m iflndex RFC 1573 An IP SLV latency value has gone Restored 121 back below a threshold for a m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib particular Class of Service for a path String Latency restored XXX XXX XXX XXX COS nn DLCI nnnr enterpriseMissed SLVDown 16 enterpriseMissed m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib
19. m devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs devFrExt mib m devLastTrapString SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold has been exceeded String SLV down on ifString due to excessive SLV packet loss Total SLV packets lost is numLost SLV Timeout Error Event has been SLVUp 116 devHealthAndStatus mib Cleared String SLV up on ifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is numLost enterprisePath m iflndex RFC 1573 A path on the network interface Down 19 m devLastTrapString has become unavailable devHealthAndStatus String mib Path xxx xxx xxx xxx Down DLCI nnnr enterprisePath m iflndex RFC 1573 A path on the network interface Up 20 m devLastTrapString has become available devHealthAndStatus String mib Path xxx xxx xxx xxx Up DLCI nnnr enterpriseRmon m devLastTrapString All RMON related option changes ResetToDefault 13 devHealthAndStatus mib have been reset to their default values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults enterpriseSelfTest m devLastTrapString Unit has completed Fail 2 devHealthAndStatus mib re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and
20. 144 2320 Sets the DSL line rate in kbps Network 1 DSL Line Rate 9788 Possible Settings If PSD Mask is Symmetric 200 264 328 392 456 520 584 648 712 776 784 840 904 968 1032 1096 1160 1224 1288 1352 1416 1480 1544 1552 1608 1672 1736 1800 1864 1928 1992 2056 2120 2184 2248 2312 If PSD Mask is Asymmetric and Region Setting is Annex A 776 784 1544 1552 If PSD Mask is Asymmetric and Region Setting is Annex B 2056 2312 Default Setting None Determines the rate on the DSL network interface Valid rates and the rates presented on the screen depend on the values of Region Setting and PSD Mask on the Network Physical Interface Options screen If a change to another configuration option renders the selected DSL Line Rate invalid the line rate is set to AutoRate Display Conditions Network 1 DSL Line Rate does not appear if Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate 200 2312 The DSL line rate is set to the specified rate in kbps Network 1 Operating Rate 9720 Possible Settings AutoRate 64 128 144 Default Setting AutoRate Determines the rate on the IDSL network interface AutoRate The unit automatically detects the line rate from the network interface 64 128 144 The IDSL line rate is set to the specified rate in kbps December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 1
21. 4 30 Configuring DLC Records 0 000 cee eee ee 4 32 Configuring PVC Connections 000 eee eee ee 4 35 Configuring the IP Path List 00 0000 c cece eee eee 4 37 Setting Up Management and Communication 4 38 Configuring Node IP Information 00000 eae 4 38 Configuring Management PVCs 0 0000 e eee eee 4 41 Configuring General SNMP Management 4 46 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions 4 48 Configuring SNMP NMS Security 000000 4 51 Configuring SNMP Traps 0 0000 eee eee eee 4 53 Configuring Ethernet Management 00000 4 57 Configuring the Communication Port 000000 4 59 Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem 4 63 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Contents 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router FrameSaver DSL Router Overview 0000 0c eee eee 5 2 FROU Sie tees ed enh ee opis LY Gere ea ree eae ae ee ee 5 3 Address Resolution Protocol 0 0 0 eee eee eee 5 3 POR AIR Ps ici tA EO ena Nh Bee Sin Rail atte Seb ee ee 5 3 Interface Configuration 0 0 00 ee 5 4 Network Address Translation 20 0 0 e eee eee ee 5 5 IP Options Processing 0 0 cece eee eee eee 5 5 Applications Supported by NAT 0020 02 eee eee 5 5 NAT Configuration Example 00000 eee 5 6 Network Address Port Translatio
22. Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port s attached DTE interchange lead LL ITU 141 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback December 2002 4 29 4 Configuration Options Configuring Frame Relay on the CSU DSU s Data Port Select Frame Relay from the Data Ports menu to configure the user data port frame relay characteristics see Table 4 14 CSU DSU Frame Relay Options Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports Frame Relay Frame Relay Options do not apply to the router Table 4 14 CSU DSU Frame Relay Options 1 of 2 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize_From_Interface Auto_On_LMI_Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting Initialize_From_Interface Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize_From_Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI
23. This option appears only when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 maximum Specifies the DLCl s committed burst size Excess Burst Size Be Bits Possible Settings 9783 0 2320000 9788 0 2312000 Default Setting 9783 2320000 9788 2312000 Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Display Conditions This option appears only when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 maximum Specifies the DLCI s committed burst size Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority 4 26 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring ATM for the Network Interface 9783 9788 9700 A2 GB20 20 Select ATM from the Network menu to display or change ATM option settings see Table 4 12 Network ATM Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Network ATM Table 4 12 Network ATM Options Cell Payload Scrambling Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting 9783 If DSLAM Type is set to Para
24. Valid bridge group number 1 is applied to all interfaces by default Any sub interfaces created on interfaces where the bridge group is applied inherit the bridge group input type list Specify the filter applied to incoming Ethernet packets by type code Refer to Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex in access list 200num The input type access list valid range for protocol type code access lists 200 299 output type list Specify the filter applied to outgoing Ethernet packets by type code Refer to Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex Ethernet Type Codes Hex out access list 200num The output type access list number valid range for protocol type code access lists 200 299 C 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 ARP Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Address Resolution Protocol ARP commands are used to create entries in the ARP table specify how long the information will be retained and remove dynamic entries in the table Table C 7 ARP Commands arp p address mac address arp type no arp p address mac address arp type Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to create or delete a single static ARP table entry Static ARP entries created with this command are permanent and are retained across resets power cycles Up to the maximum number of static ARP entries specified may be entered There are no static ARP ent
25. m 9783 RtrSLV 9788 RtrSLV Router that supports 8 PVCs and has the Advanced SLM Feature Set installed Screen Area Fields for configuring and monitoring the FrameSaver device Function Keys Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key Area then pressing Enter Message Area m System related information and valid settings for input fields in the lower left corner m System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 2 5 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Navigating Menu Driven User Interface Screens Keyboard Keys 2 6 You can navigate the menu driven user interface screens by using m Keyboard keys m Function keys to switch between the two screen work areas For CLI navigation see Navigating the Router s CLI on page 2 9 Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area Press To Esc Return to the previous screen Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Select the next valid value for the field Delete Del Delete character that the cursor is on Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Shift r Access the routers Command Line Interface CLI Ctrl l Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Up Arrow or Ctrl u
26. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Maximum Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D Latency Packet Size MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 D N Frame Size Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 D N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 2 1 D N Burst Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtBurstUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 1 D N Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtBurstOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4 1 D N Burst Frames 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtBurstFrames 1 D DLCI number l Interface ID for the frame relay link P Protocol index 9700 A2 GB20 20 H Host control index N Additional numeric index used by tabl
27. 3 of 4 show ip dhcp binding p address Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Allows users to display address bindings associated with the DHCP server If the IP address is not specified all DHCP server bindings are displayed If an IP address is specified only the DHCP server binding for the specified client is displayed ip address Specifies the DHCP client s IP address for the binding to be displayed The general format of the show ip dhcp bindings command is as follows IP Address MAC address Lease Expires X X X X XX XX XX XX XX XX ddd hh mm The first column displays the IP addresses in use The second column displays the MAC address bound to each IP address The third column displays the remaining lease time in days hours and minutes or Infinite show ip nat translations Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Shows the active Network Address Translation NAT translations The general format of the show ip nat translations command is Pro Inside global Inside local Outside local Outside global udp x x x xport xX X X X port xX X X X port X X X X port The first column Pro displays the Protocol of the port identifying the address The second column displays the Inside global IP address for one or more inside local IP addresses to the outside world The third column displays the Inside local IP address assigned to a host on the inside network The
28. Administrator Command Mode config if config subif Allows you to specify if Network Address Translation NAT is performed on an interface or sub interface and whether IP addresses on the interface are private or public addresses NAT is disabled by default Example ip nat inside inside Specifies inside private IP addresses on this interface outside Specifies outside public IP addresses on this interface ip nat translation timeout time no ip nat translation timeout time Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to specify the amount of time that a dynamically configured standard NAT non port translation mapping can remain unused before the mapping is automatically deleted The default is 24 hours To reset the timeout to the default use the no nat translation timeout command Example ip nat translation timeout 604800 NOTE When NAPT is enabled mappings are automatically deleted based on a separate set of non configurable timeouts UDP translations timeout 5 minutes TCP translations timeout 24 hours ICMP translations timeout 1 minute time The timeout value in seconds The valid range is 1 2147483647 The default is 86400 seconds 24 hours December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 8 NAT Commands 2 of 3 ip nat pool pool name start ip addr end ip addr n
29. Command Mode All modes Allows you to exit the current mode or end the session If configuration changes have been made when exit is entered the There are unsaved configuration changes Are you sure you want to exit no yes prompt appears If yes is entered the router leaves configuration mode and any configuration changes are lost If no is entered the configuration prompt is returned to so you can save your changes If in standard operating mode when exit is entered the session is ended and you are returned to the Main Menu December 2002 C 3 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Configuration Commands Configuration control commands put the router in configuration mode and allows you to save configuration changes To show a configuration see Table C 13 Show Commands Table C 3 Configuration Commands configure terminal factory Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Causes the router to enter configuration mode The router stays in configuration mode until the exit command is entered or the session times out Example configure terminal NOTES When in configuration mode SNMP set commands or changes saved from the menu driven user interface for router configuration are prevented an in use message is generated Router sub interfaces and or DLCls cannot be added or deleted via the menu driven user interface s CreatePVC function key
30. Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Right Arrow on same screen row or Tab on any screen row Move cursor to the next field Left Arrow or Ctrl b Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Left Arrow on same screen row or Ctrl k Move cursor to the previous field Enter Return Accept default or displayed entry or after entering data m Display valid options on the last row of the screen December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Function Keys 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example in Screen Work Areas on page 2 5 operate the same way throughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably For the screen Select function And press Enter to Morm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the menu driven user interface session Norn New Enter new data Ooro Modify Change existing data Lorl Delete Delete data Sors Save Save information Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the
31. Receiver Signal Element DD 115 From CSU DSU 17 A Timing DCE Source 9 B Local Loopback LL 141 To CSU DSU 18 Remote Loopback RL 140 To CSU DSU 21 Test Mode TM 142 From CSU DSU 25 E 8 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 EIA 530 A to V 35 Adapter E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments An EIA 530 A to V 35 adapter for the Model 9788 CSU DSU user data port must have the following connections An appropriate adapter is available from Paradyne Feature No 3100 F1 572 EIA 530 A DB25 SIGNAL PLUG SHIELD TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS CTS RLSD DSR SIG COMMON TTA TT B DTR RL LL TM SIG COMMON 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 Srzrecomnlgv9ox lt F lt AivwHv gt y MS34 V 35 SOCKET SIGNAL SHIELD TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS CTS RLSD DSR SIG COMMON TT A TT B DTR RL LL TM 01 16988 E 9 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter An EIA 530 A to X 21 adapter for the Model 9788 CSU DSU user data port must have the following connections An appropriate adapter is available from Paradyne Feature No 3100 F1 571 EIA 530 A DB25 DB15 X 21 SIGNAL PLUG SOCKET SIGNAL TD A TD A TD B TD B RD A RD A RD B RD B RXC A RXC A RXC B RXC B RTS A RTS A RTS B RTS B RLSD A RLSD A RLSD B RLSD B SIG COMMON SIG COMMON TT A TT A TT B
32. Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Use Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex when specifying the filter applied to incoming Ethernet packets by Type Code Many of the Type Codes listed below are distributed by Xerox Corporation Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex 1 of 2 Type Code Description Type Code Description 0000 05DC IEEE802 3 Length Field 803E DEC Unassigned 010101FF Experimental 803F DEC LAN Traffic Monitor 0200 Xerox PUP see 0A00 8040 8042 DEC Unassigned 0201 PUP Addr Trans see 0A01 8044 Planning Research Corp 0600 Xerox NS IDP 8046 8047 AT amp T 0800 DOD IP 8049 ExperData 0801 X 75 Internet 805B Stanford V Kernel exp 0802 NBS Internet 805C Stanford V Kernel prod 0803 ECMA Internet 805D Evans amp Sutherland 0804 Chaosnet 8060 Little Machines 0805 X 25 Level 3 8062 Counterpoint Computers 0806 ARP 8065 8066 University of Mass at Amherst 0807 XNS Compatibility 8067 Veeco Integrated Auto 081C Symbolics Private 8068 General Dynamics 0888 088A Xyplex 8069 AT amp T 0900 Ungermann Bass net debugger 806A Autophon OA00 Xerox IEEE802 3 PUP 806C ComDesign 0A01 PUP Addr Trans 806D Compuitgraphic Corp OBAD Banyan Systems 80E E8077 Landmark Graphics Corp 1000 Berkeley Trailer nego 807A Matra 1001 100F Berkeley Trailer encap IP 807B Dansk Data Elektronik 1600 Valid Systems 807C Merit Internodal 4242 PCS Basic Block P
33. Table E 2 Model 9783 COM Port Connector Pin Signal Direction 1 Shield GND DCE Transmit Data TXD From DTE In DCE Receive Data RXD To DTE Out From DTE In DCE Clear To Send CTS To DTE Out 2 3 4 DCE Request To Send RTS 5 6 DCE Data Set Ready DSR To DTE Out 7 Signal Ground GND 8 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 9 19 Unused 20 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 21 25 Unused Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together Model 9720 and 9788 COM Port Connector Table E 3 Model 9720 and 9788 COM Port Connector provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver Model 9788 CSU DSU s and router s 9 position EIA 232 E communication port connector 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table E 3 Model 9720 and 9788 COM Port Connector Pin Signal Direction 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD To DTE Out Receive Data RD To DTE Out Transmit Data TD From DTE In From DTE In 2 3 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 5 Signal Ground GND 6 Data Set Ready DSR To DTE Out 7 Not used 8 Clear To Send CTS To DTE Out 9 Not used Pins 1 6 and 8 are tied together December 2002 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Ethernet Port Connector E 6 Table E 4 Ethernet Port Connector provides the pin assignments for the
34. Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs imin OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Tx CIR D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs None Must be 0 Utilization Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 min configured OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 min capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 60 secs None Must be 0 TE Tag devFrExtDIciTxFrOutCIR amin configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D 1 A Absolute value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Jin the OID Interface ID for the frame relay link D DLCI number B 18 December 2002 D Delta The calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults OID Cross References The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap is sent and or a log entry is made See Table B 12 History OID Cross Reference for an RMON history OID cross reference and Table B 13 Alarm OID Cross Reference for an RMON alarm OID cross reference Table B 12 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 4 Object ID OID Item MI
35. The name of a NAT pool comprised of 1 20 ASCII printable characters interface For dynamic address translation specifies an interface or sub interface that provides the address for the translation For inside source translation specifies the interface that provides the global address If there is no address on the interface the interface has not been specified as an outside interface or the interface is not operational no translations based on this rule will occur If a public IP address is specified for NAPT on this interface that address is used instead of the interface s assigned IP address intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface SDSL network interface intf num Interface index number for both the Ethernet and Serial interfaces O or 1 sub intf num Sub interface number Sub interfaces are only supported on the network interface Serial 0 If a Serial interface is specified a sub interface must also be specified Sub interface number range is 0O 4 294 967 295 overload Specifies that Network Address Port Translation NAPT also known as Port Address Translation PAT is to be used for UDP and TCP static Specifies a fixed one to one mapping between an inside private IP address and port for PAT and a outside global IP address and port for PAT For inside source translation a private address and port for PAT is mappe
36. linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the link Loss of Cell Delineation Strings ifString down The physical link is down ifString down due to Loss of Cell Delineation ifString administratively shut down Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp No alarms on the link String ifString up December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 Trap enterprise Specific B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps are listed alphabetically below Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseCIR Change 15 m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciCIR devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib CIR has changed due to the LMI report LMI Protocol is set to Standard and the network s CIR changed String CIR on ifString changed to CIR bps enterpriseConfig Change 6 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Configuration has been changed via the menu driven user interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change enterpriseDLCI delete 17 enterpriseDLCI Down 11
37. 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds or changes the NMS IP address The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than 223 Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 51 4 Configuration Options 4 52 Table 4 22 SNMP NMS Security Options 2 of 2 Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only MIB objects access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows MIB objects read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands However access for all read only objects is specified
38. 00000e ee eee m Document Organization 000 c eee m Product Related Documents 0 000 e eee eee eee eee m Conventions Used 0 0 es 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices m System OvervieW 0 0 eee eens m FrameSaver DSL Features 00000 c cece CSU DSU Specific Features 0 0 0 0 0 ene Router Specific Features 0 0 0 0 ee Diagnostic Feature Set 0 0 0 eee Advanced SLM Feature Set 0000 cece eee eee m Network Configuration Examples 0000 cece eee eee m OpenLane SLM System 0 000 cece OpenLane Features 0 00 c cee eens 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation 9700 A2 GB20 20 B LOGGING ON spire na T es Ae ie eee a A A EE ets Ending a Session sene paea ieni 2 eee ee ide eet ee E Main Menu a eaa Oech eed os Va Ale be Sov TE E a Screen Work AreaS 00 00 eae Navigating Menu Driven User Interface Screens Keyboard KeyS 0 00 cece eee FUNCTION KEYS eeo dia eaaa e AERA ao EEE E RS ER Selecting from a Menu asussaan uaaa Switching Between Screen Areas 0000 cece eee Selecting a Field for Input 0 0 00 cee eee m Navigating the Routers CLI 000 000 e eee CLI Keyboard KeyS 0 00 c cece eee December 2002 Contents 3 Configuration Procedures Basic Configuration From the User Interface 05 3 2 Configuration Option AreaS
39. 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 1 N Port Burst Upper Limits MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 1 4 Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 1 N Rx Port Burst Octets MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 1 5 Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 1 N Tx Port Burst Octets MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 1 5 Tag devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets 1 D DLCI number H Host control index Interface ID for the frame relay link N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame burst size P Protocol index T Time mask B 22 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults See Table B 13 Alarm OID Cross Reference for an RMON alarm OID cross reference Table B 13 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC
40. 2 No action is needed Read only or 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already Allow test to continue running m Select another test m Stop the test Blank Entries Removed New had been selected from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected m No action is needed m Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot delete Trap Manager Delete was selected from Management PVCs Options but the PVC had been defined as a trap destination No action needed or configure another path for traps and try again Cannot Save no Level 1 Login IDs Security was being set up but all the logins were assigned either Level 2 or Level 3 Set up at least one login with Access Level 1 so the unit can be configured Command Complete Configuration saved or all tests have been aborted No action is needed Connection Refused Seen at an FTP terminal Two menu driven user interface sessions are already in use when a Telnet session was attempted Wait and try again Destination Not Unique Destination entered is already being used Enter another destination indicator DLCI in connection Delete connection first User tried to delete a DLCI that was part of a connection m No action needed or m Delete the connection then delete the DLCI DLCI Number Already
41. 22 28 10 1 3 2 192 128 22 29 10 1 3 3 192 128 22 30 10 1 3 4 192 128 22 31 10 1 3 5 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router p gt Procedure To set up NAT 1 From the Main Menu screen press Ctrl a then Shift r to access the router s Command Line Interface Enter the following commands en config t ip nat inside source static 10 1 3 2 192 128 22 28 ip nat inside source static 10 1 3 3 192 128 22 29 ip nat inside source static 10 1 3 4 192 128 22 30 ip nat inside source static 10 1 3 5 192 128 22 31 Enable NAT on interfaces with the following commands where x is the number configured for the sub interface interface ethernet 0 ip nat inside interface serial 0 x ip nat outside Save the configuration and exit the CLI save exit December 2002 5 7 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Network Address Port Translation Network Address Port Translation NAPT allows multiple clients in a local network to simultaneously access remote networks using a single IP address This benefits telecommuters and SOHO Small Office Home Office users that have multiple clients in an office running TCP UDP applications NAPT is sometimes referred to as PAT Port Address Translation NAPT provides a many to one mapping and uses one public address to interface numerous private users to an external network All hosts on the global side view all hosts on the local side as on
42. 221 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable V 35 Adapter and Installation Instructions FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSUs FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 8 PVCs and the Diagnostic 9783 A1 211 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and the Diagnostic 9783 A1 213 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 8 PVCs and Advanced SLM 9783 A1 221 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference For international models the country code is shown as xxx Contact your Paradyne sales office for the correct number 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 G 1 G Equipment List G 2 Description Model Number FrameSaver DSL 9783 DSU CSUs continued FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and Advanced SLM Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9783 A1 223 FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 8 PVCs and the Diagnostic Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 or 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9
43. 4 2 CSU DSU Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 3 LMI Behavior 9783 and 9788 Possible Settings Independent Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Default Setting Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Configures the state of LMI on Port 1 and the state of the ATM link on the network interface to be passed from one interface to another Independent Handles the state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of Port 1 has no effect on the state of the ATM link on the network interface and vice versa Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Brings down VCs cross connected to Port 1 on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down and sends F5 OAM cells on all network VCs cross connected to Port 1 DLCls to alert the network and far end device that frame relay data can not be delivered through the device When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network VCs are also re enabled This setting is useful at a central site when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Brings down LMI on Port 1 when there is a physical failure or ATM failure on the network interface When the alarm on the network interface is cleared Port 1 is re enabled and its control leads are reasserted This setting is useful if the rou
44. 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Tx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Rx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Rx Overruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Tx Underruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs 1 D DLCI number l Interface ID for the frame relay link N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame burst size B 24 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations CLI Commands The FrameSaver DSL Router is managed with text commands from the Command Line Interface CLI The CLI can be accessed m Locally via a PC or asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port m Remotely via a Telnet session The conventions used in the command line syntax are shown below Convention Translation Brackets indicate an optional element Braces indicate a required entry Vertical bars separate mutually exclusive elements Ente
45. 7 Network 10 7 switching between screen areas 2 8 to new software 7 47 synchronization SLV user history 1 7 System and test status messages 7 19 configuring options 4 10 displaying information 7 2 entering information and setting the clock 4 8 Frame Relay and LMI options 4 10 General options 4 19 last reset 7 19 messages 7 8 Name Contact and Location 7 2 OpenLane SLM 1 9 T T1 LMI Heartbeat 4 12 T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 4 12 4 31 T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period 4 12 4 31 Tab key 2 6 Tc 4 25 TCP 7 44 filter 5 15 port designations C 33 technical specifications F 1 IN 12 December 2002 Telnet limiting access 6 4 6 5 over TS Management Link 6 7 Login Required 4 48 Session 4 48 6 5 to remote device 8 7 Terminal emulation settings for router 5 18 Port Use 4 59 Test LED 7 5 menu 2 4 Status messages 7 22 Tests 1 5 aborting 8 17 available 8 15 Connectivity 8 20 DTE Loopback 8 23 Duration 4 19 IP Ping 8 24 Lamp 8 30 Network ATM Loopback 8 21 Network Physical 8 23 PVC 8 18 PVC Loopback 8 19 Send Monitor Pattern 8 19 SHDSL 8 23 starting or stopping 8 17 Timeout 4 19 8 16 Threshold Cell Delineation Error Event 4 27 configurable RMON alarm 1 6 SNR Margin 4 21 Exceeded 7 21 Threshold Exceeded SNR Margin alarm 8 10 throughput 1 6 time setting system clock 4 8 Timeout Inactivity 4 49 4 61 SLV 7 21 alarm 8 10 Test 4 19 8 16 trademarks A Traf
46. 9720 Operating Rate Possible Settings AutoRate 64 128 144 Default Setting AutoRate Specifies the IDSL line rate AutoRate The line rate is automatically detected when the frame relay LMI is brought up on one or both channels 64 The line rate is 64 kbps One B channel is used for the data transfer and automatic rate detection is disabled 128 The line rate is 128 kbps Both B channels are used for the data transfer and automatic rate detection is disabled 144 The line rate is 144 kbps Both B channels are used for the data transfer and automatic rate detection is disabled Channel Possible Settings B1 B2 Default Setting B1 Specifies the B channel used for data transfer when the line rate is 64 kbps Display Conditions Channel appears only when Operating Rate is set to 64 B1 The B1 channel is used for data transfer B2 The B2 channel is used for data transfer 4 20 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 8 Network Physical Interface Options 9783 Line Rate Mode Possible Settings Hunt AutoRate Fixed Default Setting AutoRate Specifies the mode to be used for rate selection Hunt The unit attempts to train at rate specified by DSL Line Rate If that fails the unit attempts to train at the next higher rate and if unsuccessful cycles through all the rates until training is successful or the unit is reset
47. AES ee Ss E 2 m DSL Network Interface and Cable 0 0 0 cee eee E 4 m Model 9783 COM Port Connector naaa anaana eee eee E 5 m Model 9720 and 9788 COM Port Connector 06 E 5 m Ethernet Port Connector 0 0 0 ccc eee E 6 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 Vii Contents Model 9720 and 9783 CSU DSU Data Port Connector E 7 Standard V 35 Straight through Cable 0 E 7 m Model 9788 CSU DSU Data Port Connector E 8 m EIA 530 A to V 35 Adapter 0 2 0 cee eee E 9 m EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter 0 0 0 eee eee E 10 m Configuring an External Modem 000000 eee eee E 11 DB25 to DB25 Crossover Cable 00 0c eee eee E 12 DB9 to DB25 Crossover Cable 0 0 00 cece ee ees E 13 F Technical Specifications G Equipment List B Equipment oona te at eee idee eee edd ete es bs G 1 E Cables ach aint oie ee ee eR Ai eee Gs G 5 Index viii December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience This document contains information that applies to FrameSaver DSL Digital Subscriber Line 9720 9783 and 9788 CSU DSUs Channel Service Unit Data Service Units and FrameSaver DSL routers running firmware release level 2 0 4 and above Features slated for firmware release 2 1 such as Telnet capability are described in this manual but may not be immediately available in all models It is intended for
48. C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 6 Bridge Commands 2 of 2 no bridge group bridge group Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if config subif Allows a user to apply or remove a set of bridge group parameters to from an interface or sub interface When a set of bridge group parameters is applied or removed at the interface level the command also applies to all sub interfaces on the interface Example no bridge group NOTE If the bridge group is only required on specific sub interfaces remove the bridge group from an interface and apply it at the sub interface level bridge group Valid bridge group number 1 is applied to all interfaces by default Any sub interfaces created on interfaces where the bridge group is applied inherit the bridge group no bridge group bridge group input type list in access list 200num output type list out access list 200num Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Allows a user to specify or remove an input or output Ethernet type code filter for an interface No bridge group filters are applied to interfaces by default Example bridge group 1 input type list 8069 NOTE The order in which access list filters are entered affects the order in which the filters are applied Each filter is applied in succession until all filters have been applied If no conditions match a frame is discarded bridge group
49. CIR after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive 10 of CIR appears after Test If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 19 8 Troubleshooting Monitor Pattern Connectivity 8 20 This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Syne message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs To run a connectivity test on a link Main Menu Test Network PVC Tests Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC A RndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms wit
50. CLI Commands Codes and Designations E CLI Commands eosi 2 nia O adenine shia ee ee eee C 1 Pager Command s 2 3 cre sendin ate ado serene Ba qe eRe al sae mes C 3 Access Control Commands 0 00 ec eee ees C 3 Configuration Commands 00 0c eee eee eee C 4 Interface Commands 00 cece eee C 5 IP Routing Commands 000 0c e eee C 8 Bridge Commands 00 cece eee C 9 ARP Commands issa ntaa aa dae een Fada res C 11 NAT Commands 0 000 ccc eee eee C 12 DHCP Server Commands 0000 cece eee eee C 15 DHCP Relay Agent Commands 00000 ee eee C 18 Filter access list Commands 0 00 000 ee eee eee C 19 Diagnostic Commands 00 0c cece eee C 23 Show Commands 0 0 0c cence eee C 25 m Ethernet Type Codes 0000 c eects C 29 m Protocol and Port Designations 0 0 00 ce eee eee C 31 ICMP Designations 000 cece C 31 TCP Port Designations 000 cece eee C 33 UDP Port Designations 00 c eee ee C 34 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts m CLI Summaries 0000 c cee D 1 Show Command Summary 000 0 0 e eee eee D 2 Access Control and System Level Command Summary D 3 CLI Command Summary 000 00 c eee eee D 4 CLI Command Default Settings 00000 ee eee D 6 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E ReanrPanelS 202s es eh Pa
51. COSx Down Path P_ Address InterfaceDLCInnnn A Class Of Service associated with a path is down COSx is the Class of Service ID associated with the path P_Address is the IP address of the path endpoint Interface is P1 Port 1 or N1 Network 1 and nnnnis the DLCI which contains the path CTS down to Port 1 Device CSU DSU only The CSU DSU s user data port CTS control lead is off DLCI nnnn Down Port 1 The DLCI for the Port 1 frame relay link is down DSL Line Training Network 1 The device is in the process of determining the right speed DTR Down from Port 1 Device CSU DSU only The device DTR control lead connected to the user data port is deasserted Ethernet Mgmt Down The Ethernet management interface is down The port is enabled and is the primary interface for management data but communication between the management system and the unit is not currently possible Ethernet Port Down The Ethernet link is down The port is enabled and is the primary interface for user data but communication between the unit and the far end is not currently possible Latency P_ Address COSx InterfaceDLCInnnn An IP SLV Latency Threshold has been exceeded for the specified COS of the Path P_Address is the IP address of the path endpoint COSx is the Class of Service ID associated with the path Interface is P1 Port 1 or N1 Network 1 and nnnn is the DLCI which contains the path
52. Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature 20 0000 e eee Viewing LMI Captured Packets from the User Interface WOINCte ed exten tithe eee ale EINT IE ENE oa oe Oe eae Alarms eea naa a aus adie ied any ae Bt Viewing the Trap Event Log sasssa auaa e eee ee Troubleshooting Tables 0 cece eee Device Problems 0 00 cece eee eee ATM Problems sesers e minea bee eee ete ees Frame Relay PVC Problems 000 eee eeeaeeee Tests Available cos eny peda hehe eg ts A thee deeming ble bo Test Timeout Feature 0 0 0 cee es Starting and Stopping a Test 0 00 c cee eee Aborting All Tests 0 2 0 eee ee PVC TeSt ttle a cies sore h otinte kes abating iere teeta ate tind ies cm ietataa dlaees PVC Loopback 00 00 cece tees Send Pattern 0 0 0 0 eee Monitor Pattern as co nroa nocd waar ed eed eee ae eset wade Connectivity oso se Taaa aa wee a aE aei Hebert E E EA Network ATM Loopback 0 000 tee Data Port Physical Tests 0 00 c eee eee DIT E Loopbacks s cisco eee eae eee eae Eh eles IP PING Tesise druira ak a a SE A ee IP Ping Test Procedure 1 0 eee ee IP Ping Test Procedure 2 0 0 0 cece ee Lamp TeStics coi oun hen ae hea Oa a bani a wank oe 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device 9700 A2 GB20 20 Op
53. Communications documentation For document numbers and titles see Product Related Documents in About This Guide 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 10 1 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device Installation and Setup of Network Health 10 2 Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions applicable to your network platform Once Network Health is installed the application must be configured to support FrameSaver devices Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so you can poll FrameSaver devices and collect data B gt Procedure To use the Network Health application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications and save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device D
54. December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 A Menu Hierarchy Configuration System Frame Relay and LMI Class of Service Definitions Service Level Verification General Network Physical Frame Relay DLCI Records 9720 Circuit Records 9783 9788 ATM 9783 9788 Data Ports Physical Frame Relay DLCI Records PVC Connections Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI IP Path List Add and Display Static Paths Management and Communication Options Node IP Management PVCs General SNMP Management Telnet and FTP Session SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Ethernet Management Communication Port External Modem on Com Port Control System Information Device Name System Name Location Contact Date Time Administer Logins Login ID Password Access Level Change Operating Mode Back to Back Mode Standard Mode Select Software Release Current Release Alternate Release Switch amp Reset LMI Packet Capture Utility Capture Interface Packet Capture Start Stop Status Packets in Buffer Display LMI Trace Log Telnet Release 2 1 Reset Device Easy Install 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 DSLAM Type 9783 Node IP Address Node Subnet Mask TS Access Create Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Port Options Screen Network 1 Operating Rate 9720 Network 1 DSL Line Rate 9783 9788 Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 978
55. Defaults This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart FrameSaver unit has just reinitialized and stabilized itself Variable Binding m Reset command sent m Power disruption String Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Trap authenticationFailure This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver unit was attempted and failed m SNMP protocol message not properly authenticated m Three unsuccessful attempts were made via a Telnet session or locally at the asynchronous terminal to enter a correct login user ID password combination m P Address security is enabled and a message was received from the SNMP Manager whose address was not on the list of approved managers String Unauthorized access attempted e g Unauthorized access attempted from COM port Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Trap linkUp and linkDown These traps are supported on the following interfaces m Physical sublayer interfac
56. ESC for previous menu Exit Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions Table 7 1 LED Descriptions identifies the front panel LEDs Table 7 1 LED Descriptions 1 of 2 Label Indication Color What It Means System LEDs OK Power and Green ON The unit has power Onetetional OFF The unit is in a power on self test or there Status is a failure ALM Operational Red ON The unit has been reset or an error has Alarm Fail been detected OFF No failures have been detected See Health and Status Messages on page 7 20 for additional information about alarms TEST Test Mode Yellow ON A loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or via the network OFF No tests are active December 2002 7 5 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 1 LED Descriptions 2 of 2 Label Indication Color What It Means Network LEDs ATM ATM Link Status Green Green The ATM link is active with cell 9783 or delineation in sync Yellow Yellow The ATM link is active with loss of cell delineation OFF The ATM link is not active ATM ATM Link Status Green Green The ATM link is active with cell 9788 delineation in sync OFF The ATM link is active with loss of cell delineation or the ATM link is not active FR Frame Relay Green ON LMI is up 9720 Link Status OFF LMI is
57. Exists The DLCI number entered on the DLCI Record Entry screen is not unique Enter another DLCI number DLCI Number Reserved User tried to designate a special troubleshooting DLC No action is needed December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 7 3 Device Messages 2 of 5 7 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do Duplicate DLCI Number DLCI entered is not unique for the frame relay link No action is needed previous contents of the DLCI number field are restored File Transfer Complete Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was performed successfully Switch to the newly downloaded software See Activating Software on page 7 47 File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful m Try again making sure you type the filename correctly m Exit the FTP session or download another file See Activating Software on page 7 47 Invalid Character x A non valid printable ASCII character has been entered Reenter information using valid characters Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy An invalid date was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Invalid date and or time An invalid date or time was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the date in the month
58. IP filtering see the Hotwire MVL ReachDSL RADSL IDSL and SDSL Cards Models 8310 8312 8314 8510 8373 8374 8303 8304 and 8343 8344 User s Guide With NAT When NAT is enabled and the IP filters are active filtering is done on the Ethernet port upstream first then downstream m Upstream From the client to the server m Downstream From the server to the client Filtering with NAT Ethernet Tx Filter DSL Ethernet DSL Public Network Ethernet Private Network 00 16905 Filtering without NAT Ethernet Tx Filter DSL Ethernet Public Private Network Network ey a F D therne e 00 16904 Land Bug Prevention The router drops all packets received on a network PVC interface or the Ethernet interface when the Source IP address is the same as the Destination IP address Smurf Attack Prevention The router ignores requests to send an ICMP echo reply to the broadcast address and ICMP echo requests with a destination of the broadcast address 5 16 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Verifying the End to End Management Path After installation of a remote router run an ATM Ping test from the Hotwire GranDSLAM B gt Procedure To ping the router 1 From the Hotwire ATM Line Card s Main Menu select the ATM Ping test Diagnostics ATM Ping D C 2 Enter a VPI of 0 and a VCI of 35 3 Select a Direction of Endpoint th
59. LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter with the time interval in seconds that the LMI network side uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 seconds December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring Class of Service Definitions Select Class of Service Definitions from the System menu to display or change the Class of Service definitions to be used with latency availability and throughput measurements of IP traffic on IP Enabled circuits Main Menu gt Configuration System Class of Service Definitions The Class of Service Definitions screen appears B gt Procedure To create a new Class of Service definition 1 To manually assign definition names and code points proceed to Step 4 2 To automatically create Class of Service names and associate them with code points according to RFCs 2474 2497 and 2498 select RicCodePoints The following settings are established Field Setting After RfcCodePoints Selected Class of Service Name 1 NewCtrl 2 Expd Fwd 3 AFClass4 4 AFClass3 5 AFClass2 6 AFClass1 7 Default Measure Latency amp Availability NORWOOD l lt lt lt lt lt
60. Main Menu gt Configuration Network Frame Relay Table 4 10 Network Frame Relay Options Traffic Policing Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines if CIR Committed Information Rate and EIR Excess Information Rate are enforced by the unit on frames sent to the network interface Enable CIR and EIR are enforced Frames that exceed CIR are marked Discard Eligible DE Frames in excess of EIR are discarded For the CSU DSU only DE frames received from the external router are credited as frames transmitted above CIR They are credited as frames transmitted between CIR and EIR until that count reaches its limit at which point they are counted as frames transmitted above EIR Disable CIR and EIR are not enforced Configuring DLCI Records for the Network Interface 9720 DLCI records can be created and modified using the Network DLCI Records screen Main Menu gt Configuration Network DLCI Records DLCI Records options are similar for the network data ports and virtual router ports See Configuring DLCI Records on page 4 32 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 23 4 Configuration Options Configuring Circuit Records for the Network Interface 9783 9788 Circuit records can be created or modified and PVCs can be created based on existing DLCls using the Network Circuit Records screen Main Menu gt Configuration Network Circuit Recor
61. Ports Generates trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only All Generates trap messages on all frame relay interfaces None No DLCI trap messages are generated DLCI Traps on Interfaces Filter Selection Field Possible Settings Normal Filter Default Setting Normal Controls whether the traps on the interfaces specified in the DLCI Traps on Interfaces configuration option are sent regardless of their cause Normal Generates trap messages specified by DLCI Traps on Interfaces regardless of cause Filter Prevents traps from being generated for the interfaces specified by DLCI Traps on Interfaces if their cause is the loss of the interface connection or LMI This includes Latency and IP SLV Availability traps December 2002 4 55 4 Configuration Options Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options 4 of 4 RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent when a selected variable in the RMON1 Alarms and Events Groups determines that the configured threshold is exceeded Display Conditions This option appears only for units with the SLV Feature Set 2 Enable Sends RMON trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send RMON trap messages Latency Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Sett
62. RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 3 of 3 m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterprise Test For physical interfaces and At least one test has been started Start 5 frame relay links on an interface or virtual circuit m iflndex RFC 1573 String testString test started on m 0 0 placeholder ifString m devLastTrapString e g DTE Loopback test started devHealthAndStatus mib on Sync Data Port S01P1 enterprise Test For virtual circuits DLCIs All tests have been halted on an Stop 105 interface or virtual circuit String testString test stopped on ifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopped on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay Trap RMON Specific 9700 A2 GB20 20 Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults on page B 14 for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 8 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause risingAlarm m alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has risen m alarmVariable RFC 1757 above the set threshold a alams leT String a ell eype Change in variableName 57 typeString threshold of m alarmValue RFC 1757 alarm
63. SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than 223 Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 53 4 Configuration Options 4 54 Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options 2 of 4 Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute Ethernet COM PVCname Default Setting AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing table see Table 4 18 Node IP Options Ethernet Uses the Ethernet interface Appears only when Interface Status for the interface is enabled see Table 4 24 Ethernet Management Options COM Uses the COM port Only available when Port
64. TS Management Link m Disabling TS Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link on page 6 7 B gt Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Sessions option Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login for the User Interface on page 6 13 Assign an access Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 level ve NOTE A user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level set for the Telnet session Keep the access at Level 1 if you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about setting Telnet and FTP configuration options 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 6 5 6 Security and Logins Limiting FTP Access FTP access can be limited by m Disabling FTP access completely Limiting FTP bandwidth m Requiring a user ID and password to login p
65. TT B 01 16987 E 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Configuring an External Modem 9700 A2 GB20 20 B gt Procedure To configure an external modem E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments 1 Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable 2 Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem See DB25 to DB25 Crossover Cable on page E 12 or DB9 to DB25 Crossover Cable on page E 13 for a drawing of the cable 3 Enable auto answer on your modem and configure it to use the following LSD DSR CTS RTS and DTR control leads See the table below for AT DO command strings Use the following command string AT amp CO amp D2 amp SO amp R1 DO SO 1 Enter AT Command To configure the modem to amp CO Force LSD on amp D2 Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR amp S0 Force DSR on amp R1 Ignore RTS DO Force CTS on S0 1 Automatically answer incoming calls December 2002 E 11 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DB25 to DB25 Crossover Cable E 12 A standard crossover cable can be used to connect the Model 9783 COM port to an external modem The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver CSU DSU See Ethernet Port Connector on page E 6 to configure an external modem This does not apply to the router Pin 14 P1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Plug Pin 14 __
66. The IP address associated with this path list item is not distributed Yes The IP address associated with this path list entry is distributed to devices in the list 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 37 4 Configuration Options Setting Up Management and Communication Options available from the Management and Communication menu are described in the following sections m Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs m Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions Configuring SNMP NMS Security Configuring SNMP Traps Configuring Ethernet Management m Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Configuring Node IP Information Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 4 18 Node IP Options When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask The Node IP set of configuration options includes a troubleshooting TS management link feature that service providers can use to isolate network device problems and allows unit link access via Telnet or FTP Link troubleshooting is essentially transparent to customer operations because no alarms or SNMP traps are generated The TS Management Link option is initially enabled The unit ships from the factory with a TS Management PVC already configured
67. Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 25 Communication Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management linkname the name given the Management PVC Appears only when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options 3 of 4 Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a fa
68. User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the network further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports If upgrading to this feature set the OpenLane SLM system is required to activate the Advanced SLM Feature Set FRF 13 compliance is possible with service level performance reporting Refer to the FrameSaver SLV Activation Instructions for upgrade information and activation procedures See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for the document number Network Configuration Examples FrameSaver DSL devices can function in a variety of network configurations The following illustration shows a typical frame relay network configuration that includes a FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU DSL Provider s etwork E Rel Operations OpenLane ANSP ay Center NM Customer Premises Customer Premises HQ Site Remote Site DSL ATM Access DHCP Frame DSL Network Server _Relay CS FrameSaver Copper ATM Endpoint A Loop gt EEEE PVC LAN rame Relay rameSaver CPE xDSL Unit DSLAM ATM ATM Router Router FRAD Switch Switch ATM NV FR Network Rees Switches lr aa Network Switches FR ATM IWF Frame Relay NSP s Network oi 16770 01 9700 A2 GB20 20 Dece
69. VCI 3 Click on Start The prompt changes to Stop and the Telnet session is initiated 4 The outbound data path is monitored for Ctrl the Ctrl key pressed simultaneously with the key When you press Ctrl the Telnet session is ended 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 7 8 Troubleshooting Alarms 8 8 The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Major alarms are displayed on line 24 and force on the Alarm LED Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 3 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do COSx Down Path P_ Address DLCInnnn A Class Of Service associated with a path is down Contact your service provider CTS down to Port 1 Device CSU DSU only The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 m Verify that the port is enabled m Check DTR for the user data port DLCI nnnn Down Port 1 CSU DSU only The DLCI for Port 1 is down Contact your network service provider DSL Line Training Alarm at Network 1 The DSL interface is training Wait for training to complete DTR Down from Port 1 Device CSU DSU only The DTR control lead on the device connected to Po
70. access privilege for an async terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the COM port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Terminal NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only Level 3 access is permitted for the port Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s access level to Level 2 or Level 3 make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set to Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 User limited to display status run tests and view configuration option settings Level 3 User limited to display status and view configuration screens only December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 25 Communication Port Options 3 of 4 Inactivity Timeout
71. attack prevention 5 16 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index SNMP assigning community names access levels 6 9 disabling access 6 8 limiting access 6 8 6 10 Management 4 46 NMS security options 4 51 Number of Managers 4 51 polling 1 5 setting up Trap Managers 4 51 trap event log 7 43 8 11 Traps 4 53 downloading B 2 standards B 6 supported 8 2 SNR Margin Threshold dB 4 21 Threshold Exceeded alarm 8 10 software changing 7 47 revision of the NAM 7 2 Source DLCI 4 35 EDLCI 4 35 Link 4 35 Spacebar 2 6 specifications technical F 1 spectral density PSD 4 22 Standard DLCI Type 4 25 Standard_out RIP 4 45 4 62 standards compliance for SNMP Traps B 6 starting a session 2 2 atest 8 17 statistics 1 6 7 29 ATM 7 38 clearing 7 42 DLCI 7 34 elements 10 3 Ethernet 7 41 Frame Relay 7 36 OID cross reference B 19 SLV 7 30 uploading to an NMS 7 48 VCC 7 39 xDSL Line 7 40 December 2002 IN 11 Index Status Activation Certificates 9 7 checking scheduled activations 9 9 Ethernet interface 4 57 Health and 7 20 information 7 18 LMI Enquiry 4 12 menu 2 4 network interface 7 26 PVC connection 7 24 7 25 System and Test messages 7 19 test messages 7 22 Stop Bits 4 60 stopping atest 8 17 Subnet Mask 4 42 4 58 4 61 Node 4 4 4 39 suggestions about user documentation A summary Activation Certificate report 9 9 Summary reports 10 7 Elements 10 8 Leaders 10
72. be specified by entering a destination IP address and mask of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 with a default gateway IP address or interface Example ip route 132 53 4 2 255 255 255 255 serial 0 x NOTE Generally routes are specified using a next hop address However routes over unnumbered point to point sub interfaces should specify the sub interface to reach the destination dest ip IP address of the destination host or network or 0 0 0 0 if a default destination gateway is specified dest mask The subnet mask to be used when the destination IP address is compared during route table lookups The dest mask cannot be 0 0 0 0 unless a dest ip address of 0 0 0 0 has been specified and only contiguous left justified masks are allowed next hop ip P address of the next hop router used to reach the destination intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface SDSL network interface intf num Valid interface index number for both the Ethernet and Serial interfaces is 0 sub intf num Sub interfaces are only supported on the network interface Serial 0 If a serial interface is specified a sub interface must also be specified Valid range for a sub interface is O 4 294 967 295 no ip routing Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Enables or disables IP routing in the device The IP routing default is Enabl
73. clients max dhcp clients no ip dhcp server ip address no ip multicast routing no ip nat inside outside no ip nat inside source List access list 1 99num pool pool name overload list access list 1 99num interface intf type intf num sub intf num overload static static ip addr1 static ip addr2 protocol static ip addr1 static port num static ip addr2 no ip nat pool pool name start ip addr end ip addr netmask netmask prefix length prefix length ip nat translation timeout time no ip nat translation timeout time ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num no ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num no ip routing no ip unnumbered null 0 lease days hours minutes infinite no lease days hours minutes infinite network network num netmask netmask prefix length prefix length no network network num netmask netmask prefix length prefix length ping protocol dest ip source source ip Length bytes timeout time interface intf type intf num sub intf num no service dhcp traceroute protocol dest ip source source ip Length bytes timeout time hops hops interface intf type intf num sub intf num December 2002 D 5 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Command Default S
74. gt Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login for the User Interface on page 6 13 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient to access SLV historical information via NMS If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers and downloads keep the access at Level 1 Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Transfer Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about setting FTP configuration options 6 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 6 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B gt Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access for a session on the TS Managem
75. is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is an example of the format for the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver DSL device PARADYNE DSL FrameSaver Model model number C or R S W Release MM mm bb MM Major mm minor bb build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 The following are the system object identifier sysObjectID system 2 or OIDs for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU and router m Diagnostic Feature Set 9720 CSU DSU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 9 3 1 9783 CSU DSU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 9 2 1 9788 CSU DSU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 9 4 1 9783 Router 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 11 1 1 9788 Router 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 11 3 1 m Advanced SLM Feature Set 9720 CSU DSU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 9 3 2 9783 CSU DSU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 9 2 2 9788 CSU DSU 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 9 4 2 9783 Router 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 11 1 2 9788 Router 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 11 3 1 NOTE The Diagnostic Feature Set OID appears until the Advanced SLM Feature Set is activated from the OpenLane SLM system 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 B 3 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Interfaces Group mib 2 Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 and RF
76. is the address of the Serial interface 0 sub interface x ip nat inside source list 1 interface se 0 x overload Specify which interface uses inside private and which uses outside public IP addresses int ethernet 0 ip nat inside int serial 0 x ip nat outside Save the configuration and exit the CLI save exit December 2002 5 9 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router NAT and NAPT Configuration Example 5 10 The router can be configured for NAT and NAPT simultaneously NAT and NAPT Example Public IP lt 2 Addresses 10 1 3 10 1 1 1 Public Network xDSL Router 01 16923 In this NAT and NAPT example Multiple workstations in the private address space can use NAPT and the server in the private address space can use NAT m The server may need NAT to send more than TCP UDP traffic or accommodate multiple types of inbound traffic types For example a Web server that uses FTP for maintenance needs access from the public address side for HTTP and FTP using NAT B gt Procedure To configure the router for both NAPT and NAT 1 Set up the router for NAPT See Network Address Port Translation on page 5 8 2 Set up a static address for any host not using NAPT ip nat inside source static 10 1 1 1 155 22 17 1 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server 9700 A2 GB20 20 The router prov
77. may appear for this statistic m Disconnected The line is not connected m 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps The Ethernet port s operating rate m Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled Duplex Duplex mode detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic m Disconnected The line is not connected m Full Ethernet port is operating in full duplex mode 4 wire m Half Ethernet port is operating in half duplex mode 2 wire m Disabled Ethernet port has been disabled Frames Transmitted Number of successfully transmitted frames on the port Frames Received Number of frames received on the port Errored Frames Number of errors detected on the port Possible errors include m Alignment errors m Internal transmit and receive errors m Long frames m Receive checksum errors m Transmitter and receiver overruns Excessive Collisions Number of failed frame transmissions due to excessive collisions Carrier Sense Errors Number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or was never asserted during frame transmissions Deferred Transmissions Number of delayed first transmissions due to the line being busy 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 41 7 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and
78. not been successful Dropped SLV Responses The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which no response from the far end device has been received 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 33 7 Operation and Maintenance DLCI Performance Statistics 7 34 Access DLCI statistics from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics DLCI One page of DLCI performance statistics appear for each enabled frame relay link that has at least one DLCI Link names may include m Netn FRn frame relay link m Rir SO DSL routers Serial port 0 m Port 1 Data port frame relay link Table 7 14 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Field What It Indicates DLCI Displays the DLCI for the selected frame relay link Use the spacebar to cycle through the DLCI list DLCI list may include m 16 1007 DLCI number m Neti ATM Appears when the DLCI is configured on a VCC m 0 15 32 255 The VPI VCI numbers display when the DLCI is configured on a VCC DLCI Up Since Date time the DLCI was declared Active after a period of inactivity m Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive m If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered m If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivit
79. number entered must be unique for the interface Changing this setting causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed IP Enabled Default Setting Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard This option cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management Link Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection IP Enabled Enables connection to one or more endpoints through a Layer 3 network A Payload Management PVC is created as well as the IP Enabled DLCI December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 15 DLCI Records 2 of 3 CIR bps Possible Settings 9720 0 144000 9783 0 2320000 9788 0 2312000 Default Setting 0 Determines t
80. of Range message 4 24 4 25 4 32 4 33 variable bindings B 13 VCC performance statistics 7 39 VCI 1 5 VPI Number 4 24 viewing LMI packet capture results 8 6 virtual path or channel identifier 1 5 Virtual Router Port 4 32 physical options 4 32 VPI 1 5 VPI VCl ATM and DLCI correlation 1 5 Number 4 24 Primary Number 4 44 W warmStart General Traps events 4 54 trap B 7 warranty A Web site access to documentation xi glossary x X X 21 EIA 530 A adapter E 10 specifying port type 4 7 xDSL Line performance statistics 7 40 December 2002 IN 13 Index IN 14 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20
81. option affects the TS Access Management Link Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions December 2002 4 49 4 Configuration Options Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options 3 of 3 FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies if a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9720 1 144 9783 1 2320 9788 1 2312 Default Setting 9720 144 9783 2320 9788 2312 Sets the maximum transmit and receive rate of a file transfer via management PVCs This option allows new firmware and configuration files to be downloaded in the background using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or downloaded at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based on TCP flow control the system FTP server throttles bandwidth to match this setting 1 maximum Sets the line speed from 1 Kbps to the maximum management speed 4 50 D
82. options 4 28 network interface options 4 20 tests network 8 23 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index pin assignments COM port E 5 Data Port E 7 E 8 Ethernet port E 6 network interface and cable E 4 ping IP ping test options 8 25 responses 8 27 test 8 24 pipelining upstream 1 2 Policing Traffic 4 23 polling SNMP 1 5 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks 4 29 Access Level 4 60 6 3 bursting 1 6 COM pin assignments E 5 communication options 4 59 control leads 7 7 Data and virtual router DLCI Records 4 32 physical options 4 28 pin assignments E 8 pin assignments 9720 and 9783 E 7 Ethernet interface status 4 57 Ethernet pin assignments E 6 TCP designations C 33 UDP designations C 34 Use 4 59 Port Type specifying 4 7 Ports Virtual Router and Data DLCI Records 4 32 power spectral density PSD 4 22 Primary DLCl 4 43 EDLC 4 44 Link 4 43 Link RIP 4 45 VPI VCI Number 4 44 printed reports 10 7 printing certificate report 9 9 problem indicators 8 2 product related documents xi Proprietary RIP 4 45 4 54 Protocol address resolution 1 2 Address Resolution ARP 5 3 encapsulations 4 7 4 27 LMI 1 2 4 30 Routing Information RIP 4 45 4 62 Simple Network Management SNMP 4 46 Proxy ARP 4 58 5 3 PSD Mask 4 22 December 2002 IN 9 Index PVC availability 1 6 connection status 7 22 7 24 connections 4 35 Loopback 8 19 Management 4 41 maximum number 1 5 multiplexed 1 5 te
83. or your Electronic Data Interchange EDI If submitting a purchase order by fax send it to 1 727 532 5270 An Activation Certificate can also be ordered through the Paradyne store at www paradyne com store Provide the following information m Model m Number of units to be activated m Your OpenLane SLM system license key number To Find Your License Key Number Your license key number was entered into your system when your OpenLane SLM system was installed and is available from the OpenLane Administration screen However to access the screen with your license key number you must log in as a user with Administrative system access B gt Procedure To find your OpenLane license key number 1 Open the OpenLane SLM application and log in as a user with Administrative access 2 A bottom of the OpenLane Administration screen select About OpenLane SLM The license key is shown mid screen below the copyright and build information December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device The Activation Certificate 9700 A2 GB20 20 An Activation Certificate will be sent to you via Federal Express NOTE If you ordered an Activation Certificate via e mail Activation Certificate information will be e mailed to you so you can start activating units immediately The actual certificate will arrive the next day When the certificate arrives it will include the following information Activation Certi
84. prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu gt Status Identity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit s Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying Identity System Information on page 7 2 to see what is included on the unit s Identity screen December 2002 7 47 7 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps option see Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options NOTES Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log see Viewing LMI Captured Packets from the User Interface in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for additional information Uploading SLV user history statistics is only available to units with Advanced SLM Feature Set activated B gt Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP s
85. provides IP addresses to DHCP clients on the local Ethernet segment This example creates a pool of 254 reusable IP addresses The command line syntax for this example is ip dhcp pool pooli7 network 155 1 3 0 255 255 255 0 default router 155 1 3 254 DHCP Relay Agent The router provides the capability of serving as a DHCP Relay Agent as specified in RFC 2131 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol The router provides the capability to enable and disable the DHCP Relay Agent and to configure the IP address of the DHCP server to which the DHCP requests are to be sent 9700 A2 GB20 20 The DHCP server assigns an IP address to the end user system When DHCP Relay is enabled it is possible to limit the number of DHCP clients The router s IP Routing table and ARP table are automatically updated The DHCP relay agent in the router should be used when there is a DHCP server at the customer s headquarters or central site DHCP relay agent setup considerations include the following DHCP server IP address must be configured DHCP relay must be enabled i e both the server address and the interface closest to the server are configured The number of DHCP clients is limited to 1 253 DHCP server and DHCP relay functions cannot be enabled at the same time NAT and DHCP relay cannot be enabled at the same time With DHCP relay enabled the router sends the DHCP request to the DHCP server December 2002 5 13 5 Configuring the Fra
86. resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage m Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used m Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults m Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults m All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration m Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 8 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information about this feature LMI
87. s IP address 2 If a login and password are required see Creating a Login for the User Interface in Chapter 6 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter 9700 A2 GB20 20 The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode cd directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file1 file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file7 on the FrameSaver node recv file file 2 Same as a get remote or help command Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a list of all Known commands is printed send file1 file 2 Same as a put December 2002 7
88. screen Select the following functions m CirSLV amp DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI statistics m ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics m ClrStats for clearing Ethernet interface statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page Selecting from a Menu B gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down J arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up 1 arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears To return to a previous screen press the Esc Escape key until you reach the desired screen 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 2 7 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Switching Between Screen Areas Use Cirl a to switch between screen areas see the example in Screen Work Areas on page 2 5 B gt Procedure To switch to the function keys area from the screen area 1 2 Press Ctrl a Select either the function s underlined character or Tab to the desired function key Press Enter The function is performed as shown in Function Keys on page 2 7 To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again Selecting a Field for Input Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current
89. set to Level 1 and that at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 If levels are not set properly access will be lost until the unit is reset to factory defaults A reset is required if the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 25 Communication Port Options Level 2 Allows Telnet access to view system information and run tests only cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access to view system information only cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set in minutes as the disconnect time FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files This
90. the date the device was activated We recommend that you print and save this report However before printing change the orientation of the report to Landscape so no information is truncated See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 9 9 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device 9 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software For FrameSaver units with the Advanced SLM Feature Set Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the example in FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report on page 10 9 To generate this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver DSL devices It includes the following m Installation and Setup of Network Health on page 10 2 m Discovering FrameSaver Elements on page 10 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements on page 10 4 m Grouping Elements for Reports on page 10 5 m Generating Reports for a Group on page 10 6 About Service Level Reports About At a Glance Reports Printed Reports m Reports Applicable to FrameSaver Devices on page 10 7 For additional information about applicable reports refer to your Concord
91. the router s Command Line Interface CLI It includes the following Logging On on page 2 2 Ending a Session Main Menu on page 2 4 Screen Work Areas on page 2 5 Navigating Menu Driven User Interface Screens on page 2 6 Keyboard Keys Function Keys Selecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field for Input Navigating the Router s CLI on page 2 9 CLI Keyboard Keys What appears on interface screens depends on 9700 A2 GB20 20 Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens December 2002 2 1 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Logging On Start a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network frame relay network service provider An in band management channel through the ATM network DSL provider Alocal in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU and a router V 35 units only An Ethernet LAN port Dial in connection using an external modem Direct terminal connection over the COM port If no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see the example in Main Menu on page 2
92. the valid range Frame Relay encapsulation is only supported on Serial ports An attempt was made to enable frame relay encapsulation on the Ethernet port For Ethernet ports interface must be 0 An unsupported interface index was entered for the Ethernet port For Serial ports interface must be 0 An unsupported interface index was entered for the serial port Gateway of last resort is not set No Gateway of last resort was configured ICMP Message type and code combination not supported The ICMP message type code combination entered is not supported by the product ICMP Message type must be 0 255 The ICMP message type entered is not within the valid range ICMP Message code must be 0 255 The ICMP message code entered is not within the valid range Invalid IP address or Mask specified The prefix length entered is not valid for the start ip address or end ip address Invalid sub interface specified The sub interface specified for deletion does not exist IP Address already in use for device management An attempt was made to reassign the Ethernet port s or node s IP address but the address is being used IP Address cannot be removed since a static route relies on it An attempt was made to delete an interface address assignment that has routing table entries other than an interface route with Next Hop Router addresses that fall wit
93. timeout period December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting When the ping has completed normally timed out or been stopped using the Stop command informational fields are displayed as shown in Table 8 6 Ping Responses Table 8 6 Ping Responses Field Possible Values Description Status m In Progress m Ping has been sent m Alive m Ping was successful Destination m The host could not be reached See Unreachable RFC 792 for possible causes m Ping Timed Out There was no response in the period specified in Response Timeout m No route inthis m The IP address is not in the routing device table and no Default IP Destination is configured Ping Loss Ratio 0 100 The ratio of pings received to pings transmitted Pings Transmitted 1 999999 The number of pings transmitted Pings Received 1 999999 The number of pings received Pings Lost 1 999999 The number of pings transmitted less the number of pings received Current Roundtrip 0 m No measurement exists Delay m 1 9999 m The time in milliseconds that it took to complete the latest ping Minimum Roundtrip E 0 m No measurement exists Deby m 1 9999 m The least time in milliseconds that it took to complete a ping during this test Maximum Roundtrip E 0 m No measurement exists Belay m 1 9999 m The most time in milliseconds that it took to complete a ping during this test Average Roundtrip 0 m No measurement exis
94. used in support of hybrid management allowing access to the endpoint from a DSL provider s Network Operation Center using the same management PVC that is used to manage the DSLAM Enable The ILMI channel is enabled SNMP traffic embedded in the ATM cells is supported Disable The ILMI channel is disabled December 2002 4 27 4 Configuration Options Configuring the User Data or Virtual Router Port The following user data port and virtual router port interface characteristics are described in the following sections Configuring the CSU DSU s Data Port Physical Interface m Configuring Frame Relay on the CSU DSU s Data Port Configuring DLCI Records Configuring the CSU DSU s Data Port Physical Interface Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to configure the user data port physical characteristics see Table 4 13 CSU DSU Data Port Physical Interface Options Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports gt Physical Data Port Physical Interface Options do not apply to the router Table 4 13 CSU DSU Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Port Type 9788 Possible Settings E530 V 35 X 21 Default Setting V 35 Determines the configuration of the data port E530 The port is configured as an EIA 530 A compatible DCE An EIA 530 A compatible DTE may be directly connected to the DB25 connector for the port V 35 The port is configured as a V 35 compatible DCE A V 35 comp
95. xDSL Line These statistics account for all traffic on the DSL line Table 7 19 SHDSL Line Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates CRC Anomalies CV The number of CRC errors also known as Code Violations CVs that occurred during the accumulation period Errored Seconds ES Number of one second intervals during which at least one CRC anomaly or LOSW defect is declared Severely Errored Seconds SES Number of one second intervals during which at least 50 CRC anomalies are declared or at least one LOSW defect is declared LOSW Seconds LOSWS Number of one second intervals during which at least one SHDSL Loss of Synchronization Word LOSW defects is declared Unavailable Seconds UAS Number of one second intervals during which the SHDSL line is unavailable The line is declared unavailable after 10 contiguous Severely Errored Seconds and declared available after 10 contiguous seconds with no SES December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Ethernet Performance Statistics Access Ethernet port statistics from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics Ethernet These statistics account for all traffic on the Ethernet port Table 7 20 Ethernet Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Port Rate Mbps Operating rate as detected on the Ethernet port One of the following
96. 0 4 7 4 20 back door access when locked out 8 4 IN 1 Index Backspace 2 6 2 9 Back to Back 4 8 Mode Active 7 20 basic feature set 1 4 Bc 4 26 4 33 Be 4 26 blank field 2 8 Bridge CLI commands C 9 filtering 5 15 Burst Size Committed 4 25 4 33 Excess 4 26 4 34 bursting port 1 6 C cables DB25 to DB25 EIA 232 D crossover E 12 DB9 to DB25 standard EIA 232 D crossover E 13 DSL network interface E 4 standard V 35 straight through E 7 canceling activations 9 9 Cell Delineation Error Event Threshold 4 27 Payload Scrambling 4 27 central clock 1 7 certificate status 9 7 Certificate Summary Report 9 9 changing Access Levels 6 12 configuration options 3 5 software release 7 47 Channel 9720 4 7 4 20 Character Length 4 59 matching 2 8 CIR 4 25 4 33 automatic determination 1 4 enforcement 4 23 statistics 7 31 Circuit multiplexed PVCs 8 20 Records configuring 4 24 Class of Service Code Points 4 15 performance statistics 7 35 Clearing 7 42 Event LMI 4 11 4 31 existing information 4 8 statistics 7 42 IN 2 December 2002 CLI 2 1 access and configuration 1 3 commands C 1 keyboard keys 2 9 limiting access 6 11 messages 7 13 uploading downloading router configuration 5 18 Clock Invert Transmit 4 28 setting system 4 8 Source Transmit 4 29 ClrAllCodePoints 4 13 Code Points 4 15 codes Ethernet type C 29 COM port configuring for an external mo
97. 0 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 6 3 6 Security and Logins Controlling External COM Port Device Access Dial in access to the user interface can be controlled when an external device modem is connected to the units COM port The External Device Commands option must be set to AT B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Select the External Modem options Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port 2 Enable the Dial In Access configuration option This option appears only when the External Device Commands option is set to AT 3 Save your changes See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about external device communication port configuration options Controlling Telnet and FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access to the user interface via a Telnet and or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be via a standard management link or a service provider s TS Troubleshooting management link For details regarding Telnet access to the Command Line Interface refer to Controlling Router CLI Access on page 6 11 6 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 6 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet Access Telnet access can be limited by m Disabling Telnet access completely m Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions m Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the
98. 00 Excess Burst Size entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid Excess Burst Size 0 1536000 DLCI Number entered is less than 16 or greater than 1007 Enter a valid number 16 1007 7 12 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 Router CLI Messages 7 Operation and Maintenance The router s Command Line Interface messages are listed alphabetically in Table 7 4 CLI Messages Refer to Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations for show commands and additional information Table 7 4 CLI Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates Access list entry already exists An attempt was made to add an already existing access list rule Access list does not exist An attempt was made to delete a non existent access list Access list is not assigned An attempt was made to delete a non existent access list assignment Access list number must be between 1 and 299 The access list number entered is outside the valid range Access list number must be between 200 and 299 The access list number entered to create a bridge filter rule is outside the valid range Administrator level access is required for this command An attempt was made to access configuration information without the authorized access level ARP Timeout can only be specified on the Ethernet port An attempt wa
99. 00K 140K 12 100 aK aK aK o AY Frames In frames sec mo e a a a a a pymp DLCI Up Time Latency Maximum Average msec 2 w 40 20 o s g s oe Time Meo Average Burst Out Distribution bytes sec 180K 12 ax E Burst Range Gj Bursi Range 2 E Bursi Range 3 E Burst Range 4 E Burst Range 5 Network Frame Drops sec E lt 0i00bytos E lt 0200 bytes E lt 0800 bytes E lt 1000 bytas E lt 4000 bytes as Link Up Time wa ms ws om ns os eff e ef ef 2 amp gg e amp amp f SP E SSF Lf SF Time Time Auta Range Custom Created 1029 1998 D4 10 07 PM From 10 27 1986 00 10 PM To 1927 1998 03 39 PM December 2002 10 9 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device m Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 10 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Menu Hierarch
100. 014 SGI network games 80FF 8103 Wellfleet Communications 8015 SGI reserved 8107 8109 Symbolics Private 8016 SGI bounce server 8130 Waterloo Microsystems 8019 Apollo Computers 8131 VG Laboratory Systems 802E Tymshare 8137 8138 Novell Inc 802F Tigan Inc 8139 813D KTI 8035 Reverse ARP 814C SNMP 8036 Aeonic Systems 9000 Loopback 8038 DEC LANBridge 9001 3Com Bridge XNS Sys Mgmt 8039 803C DEC Unassigned 9002 9003 3Com Bridge TCP IP Sys amp loop detect 803D DEC Ethernet Encryption FFOO BBN VITAL LanBridge cache C 30 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Protocol and Port Designations The following tables are used for filtering ICMP Designations Use the Internet Control Management Protocol ICMP designations in Table C 15 ICMP Designations when specifying a specific ICMP message to be filtered Table C 15 ICMP Designations 1 of 2 Type Code ICMP Message Description 0 0 echo reply Echo ping reply All 3n Destination unreachable 3 0 net unreachable Network unreachable 3 1 host unreachable Host unreachable 3 2 protocol unreachable Protocol unreachable 3 3 port unreachable Port unreachable 3 4 packet too big Fragmentation needed and do not fragment DF bit set 3 5 source route failed Source route failed 3 6 network unknown Destination network unknown 3 7 host unknown Destination ho
101. 02 3 3 3 Configuration Procedures Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options To access and display configuration options load a configuration option set into the edit area B gt Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing 1 From the Main Menu press the down arrow key until the cursor is on Configuration 2 Press Enter to display the Configuration menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer or Scratchpad configuration option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded 3 Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration options Current Configuration Customer Configuration Scratchpad Configuration or Default Factory Configuration and press Enter The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps is shown in this guide as the menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 3 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 3 Configuration Procedures Changing Configuration Options When security has been set up only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options See Chapter 6 Security and Logins for additional information B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a s
102. 1 port MAC address 7 2 Port Down 7 20 port pin assignments E 6 type codes C 29 even parity 4 59 Event Log Trap 7 43 8 11 examples network configuration 1 7 exception points 10 7 Exception reports 10 7 Excess Burst Size Be Bits 1 4 4 26 4 34 External Device Commands 6 4 Modem Com Port options 4 63 Commands 4 63 configuring E 11 Transmit Clock 4 29 F faceplate 7 3 FDR DDR 1 6 features of the unit 1 2 field is blank 2 8 file transfer 7 44 9700 A2 GB20 20 filter access list CLI commands C 19 filtering bridge 5 15 IP with without NAT 5 16 router 5 15 Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 6 Frame Relay Aware Management 1 4 configuring on CSU DSU s dataport 4 30 configuring system 4 10 configuring the network interface 4 23 errors 7 36 statistics 7 35 7 36 Traffic Policing 1 5 troubleshooting PVC problems 8 14 frames packets if DE bit set 4 43 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 4 7 4 27 from FrameSaver device 8 7 FTP 7 44 configurable transfer rate 1 4 file transfers 7 44 initiating a session 7 45 limiting access 6 4 6 6 over TS Management Link 6 7 Login Required 4 50 Max Transfer Rate Kbps 4 50 Session 4 49 6 6 user history poller 1 6 function keys 2 5 2 7 G G 991 2 Annex conformance 4 22 G shdsl statistics 7 40 Gateway 7 28 Address acting as an agent 4 58 Default 4 58 General options 4 19 SNMP management 4 46 system control leads 7 7 Traps 4 5
103. 1 ATM m The ATM link is the source destination 9783 9788 on Network 1 m Port 1 m The CSU DSU s user data port is the CSU DSUs only source destination m Mgmt PVC Name m The virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit Name is the link name m Rtr SO m The source link is the virtual router s Routers only frame relay link internally connected to its Serial O interface 7 24 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 7 9 7 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status Screen 2 of 2 Field Display What It Indicates DLCI m DLCI 16 1007 VPI VCI 0 15 VPI 31 255 VCI Identifies the source destination of the specified virtual circuit Management PVCs built on the ATM link display the VPI VCI value in parentheses instead of a DLCI number EDLCI 0 to 62 IP PM For multiplexed DLCls a number from 0 to 62 identifies an individual link embedded within a DLCI For IP Enabled DLCls IP is displayed For DLCls not IP enabled that are the primary destination of a payload managed PVC PM is displayed Status Active Inactive Disabled Invalid Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMls and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection m The PVC is currently active Both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active for the circuit to be active m The PVC is inactive because Alar
104. 12 2 no room for option Parameter required but no room 13 0 timestamp request Timestamp request 14 0 timestamp reply Timestamp reply 15 0 information request Information request 16 0 information reply Information reply 17 0 mask request Address mask request 18 0 mask reply Address mask reply December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations TCP Port Designations 9700 A2 GB20 20 Use the Transmission Control Protocol TCP port designations in Table C 16 TCP Port Designations when specifying a specific TCP port to be filtered Table C 16 TCP Port Designations TCP Port TCP Port Table Description 7 echo Echo 9 discard Discard 13 daytime Daytime 19 chargen Character generator 20 ftp data FTP data connections 21 ftp File Transfer Protocol 23 telnet Telnet 25 smtp Simple Mail Transport Protocol 37 time Time 43 whois Nicname 49 tacacs TAC Access Control System 53 domain Domain Name Service 70 gopher Gopher 79 finger Finger 80 WWW World Wide Web HTTP 101 hostname NIC hostname server 109 pop2 Post Office Protocol v2 110 pop3 Post Office Protocol v3 111 sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call 119 nntp Network News Transport Protocol 179 bgp Border Gateway Protocol 194 irc Internet Relay Chat 512 exec Exec rsh 513 login Login rlogin 514 cmd Remote commands rcmd 514 syslog Syslog 515 I
105. 2 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 19 Management PVC Options 4 of 4 Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Proprietary In Standard_out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCIs Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLCls Standard_out Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment Display Conditions This option does not appear if Payload Managed is enabled None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP Versioni to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 4 11 Circuit Records Options Proprietary In Release 2 1 The device distributes only the following local routes to the far end Trap manager routes Default route Routes to this device MIB injected routes RIP split horizon with poison reversed routes Standard_out The device sends standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about FrameSaver units in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the FrameSaver management interface port Encapsulation Possible Settings Rou
106. 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDIciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Current Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest 1 D DLCI number l Interface ID for the frame relay link N Additi
107. 223 Clear Fills the default gateway s IP address with zeros All packets without a route are discarded Proxy ARP Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the Ethernet interface can be used to supply the FrameSaver MAC address at the opposite end of a PVC by using ARP This technique is used for communication between devices on the same network but on the different subnets Using this technique the Default Gateway Address is provided when there is an ARP request When data is sent to the gateway the gateway forwards the data to the appropriate device The gateway acts as an agent destination device Enable Proxy ARP is enabled on the Ethernet interface Disable The Ethernet interface cannot be used to acquire the FrameSaver IP address at the opposite end of the PVC December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring the Communication Port 9700 A2 GB20 20 Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 4 25 Communication Port Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 4 25 Communication Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port It can be configured as a communications
108. 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed for the Ethernet management link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the Ethernet management link so it can be viewed or edited The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than 223 Clear Fills the IP address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address s Subnet Mask for the Ethernet management link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Sets the Ethernet management link s subnet mask The range for each byte is 000 to 255 When set to 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default Subnet Mask based on the IP address s class Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Clear Fills Subnet Mask with zeros Default Gateway Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address for the Ethernet management link s default gateway used for packets sent out the Ethernet management link that do not have a route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the Ethernet management link so the address can be edited The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than
109. 3 9788 Port 1 Port Type 9788 A 3 A Menu Hierarchy FrameSaver DSL Routers Menu Structure Status System and Test Status Self Test Results Last System Reset Health and Status Test Status LMI Reported DLCls DLCI Status CIR bps IP Path Connection Status Device Name IP Address Status Discovery Source PVC Connection Status Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status IP Routing Table Destination Mask Gateway Hop Type Interface TTL Performance Statistics Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ATM VCC xDSL Line Ethernet Clear All Statistics Trap Event Log Number of Trap Events Time of Day Event Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity System NAM Test Network PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Network ATM Loopback Tests ATM Ping IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests A 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 A Menu Hierarchy Configuration System Class of Service Definitions Service Level Verification General Network Physical Frame Relay Circuit Records ATM Virtual Router Ports DLCI Records PVC Connections Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI IP Path List Add and Display Static Paths Management and Communication Options Node IP Management PVCs General SNMP Management Telnet and
110. 3 Configuration Procedures December 2002 2 3 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Main Menu 2 4 Entry to all FrameSaver device tasks begins at the Main Menu which provides access to several menus The Access Level appears at the top of the screen when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9783 RtrSLV Device Name Node A 2 26 2001 02 01 MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control Easy Install Shift r to access the Router s CLI appears only for the FrameSaver DSL Router See Navigating the Router s CLI on page 2 9 for additional information Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections statistics LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information except the router s CLI Test Select start and stop tests for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces except the router s CLI Configuration Display and edit the configuration option settings except the router s CLI Control Control the menu driven user interface device naming login administration except the router s CLI clock setting and software releases selection You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit Easy Install Perform a quick installation See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of FrameSaver device menu structures December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Screen
111. 4 You can begin your session If security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears Begin your session NOTE If your login is valid but access is denied there are two currently active sessions Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts m A Telnet session is closed m The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal or modem m An external modem is disconnected m An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination When the user interface has been idle the device times out and the session is automatically ended the screen goes blank Press Enter to reactivate the interface 2 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Ending a Session 9700 A2 GB20 20 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation p gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each charact
112. 4 generating reports 10 6 glossary x grouping elements for reports 10 5 H hardware revision of the NAM 7 2 HDLC errors frame relay statistics 7 37 Health and Status 8 2 messages 7 20 history OID cross reference B 19 December 2002 IN 5 Index Hop 7 28 Hunt Line Rate Mode 4 5 4 21 4 22 I ICMP 5 2 designations C 31 Identity displaying 7 2 IDSL network physical interface options 4 20 Ignore Control Leads 4 60 ILMI 4 27 Inactivity Timeout 4 49 4 61 in band router management 1 2 Inbound Heartbeat LMI 4 31 Initial Route Destination 4 54 initiating an FTP session 7 45 installation and setup Network Health 10 2 unit 1 4 Interface CLI commands C 1 C 5 route C 6 Interface Status of Ethernet port 4 57 Internal Transmit Clock 4 29 interoperability DSLAM type 4 4 Intf IP Address 4 42 Subnet Mask 4 42 Inverse ARP 1 2 Invert Transmit Clock 4 28 IP Default Destination 4 39 filtering 5 16 NMS Validation 4 51 node information 4 38 options processing 5 5 Ping test 8 24 routing 5 3 CLI commands C 8 Routing Table 7 27 IP Address 4 58 4 61 distributing to other FrameSavers 4 37 interface 4 42 limiting SNMP access 6 10 NMS 4 51 NMS number 4 53 Node 4 4 4 39 4 42 IP Enabled DLCI performance statistics 7 35 DLCI Type 4 32 IP SLV availability traps 4 56 IN 6 K keys CLI navigation 2 9 function 2 5 2 7 keyboard 2 6 L Lamp Test 7 22 8 30 la
113. 45 7 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you need to download the software into the Alternate Release directory Upgrades can be performed through the m Network using a Management PVC or COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 25 Communication Port Options p gt Procedure To download software 1 2 7 46 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed Invalid file The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this ti
114. 5 DLCI Records Table 4 16 PVC Connections Table 4 17 IP Path List Table 4 18 Node IP Options Table 4 19 Management PVC Options Table 4 20 General SNMP Management Options Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 4 22 SNMP NMS Security Options Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options Table 4 24 Ethernet Management Options Table 4 25 Communication Port Options Table 4 26 External Modem COM Port Options December 2002 4 9 4 Configuration Options Configuring the Overall System The System menu options are described in the following sections m Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the CSU DSU Configuring Class of Service Definitions Code Point Definitions Service Level Verification Options Advanced SLM Feature Set Configuring General System Options Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the CSU DSU Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI Local Management Interface options for the entire system see Table 4 2 CSU DSU Frame Relay and LMI Options The Frame Relay and LMI options do not apply to the router Main Menu gt Configuration System gt Frame Relay and LMI Table 4 2 CSU DSU Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 3 LMI Behavior 9720 Possible Settings Independent Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Default Setting Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Allows the state of the LMI to be pass
115. 700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 11 Circuit Records Options 2 of 3 DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed IP Enabled Default Setting Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard multiplexed or IP Enabled This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard Display Conditions This option cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management Link It is not applicable when FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode is set to Translational see Table 4 12 Network ATM Options Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection IP Enabled Enables connection to one or more endpoints through a Layer 3 network A Payload Management PVC is created as well as the IP Enabled DLCI CIR bps Possible Settings 9783 0 2320000 9788 0 2312000 Default Setting 0 Determines the data rate in bits per second for the DLCI that the network commits to accept
116. 74 8303 8304 and 8343 8344 User s Guide 8335 A2 GB20 Hotwire ATM Line Cards Models 8335 8355 8365 and 8385 User s Guide 8820 A2 GN20 Hotwire 8820 GranDSLAM Installation Guide Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GB30 OpenLane SLM Reports Reference Guide 7800 A2 GB32 OpenLane SLM Administrator s Guide 7800 A2 GZ46 OpenLane SLM Oracle Database Administration Instructions NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals December 2002 xi About This Guide To order a paper copy of this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 m Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 Conventions Used xii Convention Interpretation Brackets indicate an optional element Braces indicate a required entry Vertical bars sep
117. 783 A1 311 xxx FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and the Diagnostic Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 or 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9783 A1 313 xxx FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 8 PVCs and Advanced SLM Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 or 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9783 A1 321 xxx FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and Advanced SLM Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 or 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9783 A1 323 xxx FrameSaver DSL 9788 CSU DSUs FrameSaver DSL 9788 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and the Diagnostic Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke V 35 Adapter Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9788 A1 211 FrameSaver DSL 9788 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and Advanced SLM Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke V 35 Adapter Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9788 A1 221 FrameSaver DSL 9788 CSU DSU with 64 PVCs and the Diagnostic Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9788 A1 311 FrameSaver DSL 9788 CSU DSU
118. A2 GB20 20 December 2002 3 5 3 Configuration Procedures For the router saving also updates the router s configuration database adding newly configured DLCls or subnets that do not yet exist in the router database NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost 3 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options 9700 A2 GB20 20 This chapter describes all the configuration options available on the FrameSaver DSL devices They can be modifed using the user interface or OpenLane SLM m Using the Easy Install Feature on page 4 3 m Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock on page 4 8 m Configuration Option Tables on page 4 9 m Configuring the Overall System on page 4 10 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the CSU DSU Configuring Class of Service Definitions Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options m Configuring Network Interfaces on page 4 20 Configuring the Network Physical Interface Configuring Frame Relay for the Network Interface Config
119. Abe CIB Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise APYE GIN Tag devFrExtDiciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered M B pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise pov CIB ere B Tag devFrExtDiciDropFrCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 57 1 D Network Frames Dropped MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Above CIE INES Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDropCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D Network Frames Offered M B pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciOfferedFrOverEir 1 D DLCI number l Interface ID for the frame relay link P Protocol index B 20 H Host control index N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame burst size T Time mask December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDropOverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D DLCI EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag pdnlfExtTotalUASs
120. B Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 SDSL Interface Rate Link Speed MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 1 Received Frames MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag iflnUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 1 Sent Frames MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifOutUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 D DLCI number l Interface ID for the frame relay link P Protocol index 9700 A2 GB20 20 H Host control index N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame burst size T Time mask December 2002 B 19 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Tab
121. C 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information provides the ifName for each interface type the ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Network SDSL DSL Network Interface Network SDSL DSL FR NAM 101020001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Ethernet Ethernet Port Ethernet Port DSL FR NAM 101006001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Port 1 Port 1 DSL FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh COM Communications Port COM Port DSL FR NAM 101004001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR UNI Frame relay logical link For the DTE side Network SDSL 101023001 on the DSL network of FR DTE DSL FR NAM interface Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side Network SDSL of FR SERVICE DSL FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical link For the user side Synchronous 101016001 on Synchronous Data Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 Port 1 DSL FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 DSL FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh ATM Cell Logical Layer ATM ATM on the DSL Network SDSL o
122. CE Source RXC X B Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 From DSU Out Y A DCE Source TXC AA B Test Mode Indicator TM 142 From DSU Out NN Standard V 35 Straight through Cable A standard V 35 straight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port toa DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port anda 34 position socket type connector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 E 7 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Model 9788 CSU DSU Data Port Connector Table E 6 Model 9788 CSU DSU Data Port Connector provides the pin assignments for the 25 position EIA 530 A connector to the DTE This does not apply to the router Table E 6 Model 9788 CSU DSU Data Port Connector Circuit ITU T Signal Mnemonic Number Direction Pin Shield 1 Signal Common AB 102A 7 Signal Common AC 102B 23 Transmitted Data BA 103 To CSU DSU 2 A 14 B Received Data BB 104 From CSU DSU 3 A 16 B Request to Send CA 105 To CSU DSU 4 A 19 B Clear to Send CB 106 From CSU DSU 5 A 13 B Received Line Signal Detector CF 109 From CSU DSU 8 A 10 B DCE Ready CC 107 From CSU DSU 6 DTE Ready CD 108 1 2 To CSU DSU 20 Transmit Signal Element DA 113 To CSU DSU 11 B Timing DTE Source 24 A Transmit Signal Element DB 114 From CSU DSU 12 B Timing DCE Source 15 A
123. D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Threshold Default Sample Event Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Rising Falling Tx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards ao mine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 Rx Total D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Errors Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs enn OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Tx Total D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Errors Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 13 miris OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Rx Overruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns ip mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Underruns Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 15 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Non octet D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 allan Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet mine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Errors Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr pins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Errors 15 mins 1 D Delta The calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID f
124. DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLC detail information and comparison to identify DLCls with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of the service provided by the network m Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLCls within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level information for customers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines dail
125. Easy Install Configuration Options 4 of 4 Network 1 Channel 9720 Possible Settings B1 B2 Default Setting B1 Specifies the B channel used for data transfer when the line rate is 64 kbps Display Conditions Network 1 Channel appears only when Network 1 Operating Rate is set to 64 B1 The B1 channel is used for data transfer B2 The B2 channel is used for data transfer Port 1 Port Type 9788 CSU DSU Possible Settings E530 V 35 X 21 Default Setting V 35 Specifies the port type of the data port E530 The port is configured as an ElIA 530 A compatible DCE An EIA 530 A compatible DTE may be directly connected to the DB25 connector for the port V 35 The port is configured as a V 35 compatible DCE A V 35 compatible DTE may be connected to the port using a DB25 to MS34 adapter X 21 The port is configured as an X 21 compatible DCE An X 21 compatible DTE may be connected to the port using a DB25 to DB15 adapter Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 9783 and 9788 Possible Settings Translational Transparent Default Setting Transparent Specifies the type of FRF 8 upper layer protocol encapsulation used on the link for each pair of interoperable Frame Relay and ATM PVCs Translational Encapsulated data is translated RFC 1490 to RFC 1483 FrameSaver multiplexing and SLV communications are not supported in this mode Transparent Encapsulated data is for
126. FTP Session SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Ethernet Management Communication Port External Modem on Com Port Control System Information Device Name System Name Location Contact Date Time Administer Logins Login ID Password Access Level Change Operating Mode Back to Back Mode Standard Mode Select Software Release Current Release Alternate Release Switch amp Reset Telnet Release 2 1 Reset Device Easy Install DSLAM Type 9783 Node IP Address Node Subnet Mask TS Access Create Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Management Options Screen Network 1 DSL Line Rate Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 A 5 A Menu Hierarchy A 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This appendix contains the following m MIB Support on page B 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps on page B 2 m System Group mib 2 on page B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 m Interfaces Group mib 2 on page B 4 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable NetScout Probe Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps on page B 6 Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Trap linkUp and linkDown Trap enterprise Specific Trap RMON Specific m RMON Alarm and Event Defaults on page B 14 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
127. FrameSaver DSL Models 9720 9783 and 9788 User s Guide Document No 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 ANADIA S Copyright 2002 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentat
128. FrameSaver CSU DSU s and router s Ethernet interface 8 position unkeyed modular jack which is similar to an RJ45 jack Table E 4 Ethernet Port Connector Pin 10 100BaseT Signal Direction 1 Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 2 Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 3 Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 4 5 Unused 6 Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 7 8 Unused December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Model 9720 and 9783 CSU DSU Data Port Connector Table E 5 Model 9720 and 9783 CSU DSU Data Port Connector provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE This does not apply to the router Table E 5 Model 9720 and 9783 CSU DSU Data Port Connector ITU T Signal Number Direction Pin Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In C Clear to Send CTS 106 From DSU Out D Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector RLSD or LSD 109 From DSU Out F Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 To DSU In H Local Loopback LL 141 To DSU In L Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In P A S B Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out R A T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In U A DTE Source XTXC or TT W B Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out V A D
129. GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring the IP Path List Select IP Path List Static from the Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change the list of static path IP addresses explicitly defined in the unit Main Menu gt Configuration IP Path List Static The IP Path List Static screen appears showing any existing static paths Paths discovered as SLV packets are received from other FrameSaver units are not shown To view the entire current IP Path List use the IP Path Connection Status screen See P Path Connection Status in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance B gt Procedure To add a static path 1 Select New The following prompt appears Enter IP Address press ESC to abort 7 a FWD No 2 Enter the IP address of a static path and select a forwarding option of No or Yes using the spacebar 3 Press enter Select Save Table 4 17 IP Path List IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 001 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the address of a FrameSaver or other device at the other end of a path 000 000 000 001 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Specifies the address of a device FWD Possible Settings No Yes Default Setting No Determines whether this path list item is sent to all other addresses in the list that represent FrameSaver devices No
130. I Down Port 1 CSU DSU only The Local Management Interface is down for the specified frame relay link For the user data port not applicable to the router m Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends m Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured m Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used Loop Attenuation Defect at Network 1 9788 only The observed loop attenuation exceeds the configured threshold value Contact your network provider LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface m Network cable problem Network facility problem m Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends m Contact your network provider Loss of Cell Delineation atm link The ATM Transmission Convergence TC layer has been in a Loss of Cell Delineation LCD state for one minute or the number of Out of Cell Delineation OCD events has exceeded the user specified threshold Contact your network provider 9700 A2 GB20 20 1 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 December 2002 8 9 8 Troubleshooting 8 10 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 3 Alarm Cond
131. Link Down Administratively Port 1 CSU DSU only The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 7 6 7 Operation and Maintenance Health and Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates LMI Discovery In Progress Port 1 LMI protocol discovery is being performed to determine the protocol to be used on the specified frame relay link This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well LMI Down Port 1 The Local Management Interface has been declared down for Port 1 LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface The condition is cleared as soon as a signal is detected Possible reasons include m Network cable problem m No signal is being transmitted at the far end unit Loss of Cell Delineation atm_link The ATM TC Transmission Convergence layer has been in a Loss of Cell Delineation LCD state for one minute or the number of Out of Cell Delineation OCD delineation events has exceeded the user specified threshold Network Com Link Down The COM port communication link is down The COM port is configured for Net Link Path P_ Address Down InterfaceDLCInnnn A path on the network interfac
132. Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring PVC Connections 9700 A2 GB20 20 TS Management is initially enabled and configured on VPI VCI 0 35 by default Any valid DLCI VPI VCI can be used Main Menu gt Configuration gt PVC Connections From this screen create the PVC connections and go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key See Configuring Management PVCs on page 4 41 for management PVC configuration options You can quickly remove unused DLCls in an existing PVC connection by selecting the Delete function key and responding Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted Pvc prompt Table 4 16 PVC Connections 1 of 2 Source Link Possible Settings Port 1 Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Port 1 For the FrameSaver CSU DSU specifies th
133. Once concurrent routing bridging is enabled you must configure an explicit bridge route for any protocol to be routed on interfaces in a bridge group Example bridge crb 1 route ip crb Enable or disable concurrent routing and bridging on the device bridge group Bridge group 1 is created by default If a bridge group is specified one of the following attributes must be specified acquire Configure a learning bridge that is capable of dynamically learning new stations This argument is configured by default on all bridge groups The no bridge command is not accepted for this argument aging time Specifies the length of time that an unused dynamic entry is maintained in the bridge table The no bridge command resets the aging time to the default value aging time Valid range is 10 1 000 000 seconds The default is 300 protocol Specify a spanning tree protocol span tree protocol Valid spanning tree protocol for IEEE 802 1 protocol is ieee priority Specify the priority ranking for this bridge The higher the number the less likely this bridge will be selected as the spanning tree root span tree priority Valid priority values when spanning tree protocol is IEEE 802 1 are 0 65535 The default is 32768 route Specify a protocol to be routed in this bridge group when concurrent routing and bridging are enabled route protocol Valid routing protocol is IP December 2002 C 9
134. P Access Over the TS Management Link 6 7 Controlling SNMP Access 0 0 0 eee eee eee 6 8 Disabling SNMP Access 0 000 cece eee eee 6 8 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 6 9 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 6 10 December 2002 iii Contents Controlling Router CLI ACCESS n ananasa cece eee 6 11 Access Levels Command Modes 0 0000 eae 6 11 Changing Access LevelS 00 c cence eens 6 12 Creating a Login for the User Interface 0 000 e eee 6 13 Modifying aLOGIN 1 6 eee 6 14 Deleting aLogin E E E EE E EEEE AR 6 14 7 Operation and Maintenance iv Displaying Identity System Information ssn aaan 7 2 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 0 000 cece eee eee 7 3 LED Descriptions 000 eee 7 5 Control Lead Descriptions 0 0000 e eee eee 7 6 Device MessageS 60 ark iaa eee ees 7 8 Router CLI Messages 00 0 0c eee ee 7 13 Status INtOrMaAtioNy esos ainra eet aire be ese aed err eee eee 7 18 System and Test Status Messages 0 000 c eee eee ae 7 19 Self Test Results Messages 0 000 cee eee eee eee 7 19 Last Reset ini n er ha a a ee E eee eee aden welt 7 19 Health and Status MessageS 00 0 eee eee eee 7 20 Test Status MessageS 0 000 e eee eee 7 22 IP Path Connection Status 0 0 0 0 0 saaa eaa 7 22 PVC Connection StatuS
135. P access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages B gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 6 8 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 6 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager access can be limited by m Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit s MIB m Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access a MIB object the community name must be supplied B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Assign SNMP Community Name 1 and or 2 Community Name text Up to 255 characters Assign the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name
136. Packet Capture Utility Feature The FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU provides a packet capture utility to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data port can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis This feature does not apply to the router The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing LMI Captured Packets from the User Interface on page 8 6 for additional information on this feature B gt Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 In the first field Capture Interface select the enabled frame relay link Port 1 3 Start packet capture While capturing data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugging decoding See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for ad
137. RisingThreshold by na alarmValue m alarmRisingThreshold or AlarmRisingThreshold alarmFalling Threshold RFC 1757 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib fallingAlarm m alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has fallen m alarmVariable RFC 1757 m alarmSampleType RFC 1757 m alarmValue RFC 1757 m alarmFallingThreshold RFC 1757 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib below the set threshold String Change in variableName typeString threshold of alarmRisingThreshold by alarmValue AlarmRisingThreshold December 2002 B 13 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults RMON Alarm and Event Defaults The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor Thresholds are set using the OpenLane SLM System When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap is sent or an event is logged Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType 1 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 2 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 The following alarm default tables show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit alarm and event type
138. S DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Status Result Pvc Loopback Inactive 0 00 00 Send Pattern Inactive 0 00 00 Monitor Pattern Inactive 0 00 00 Sequence Errors 99999 Data Errors 99999 Connectivity Inactive RndTrip Time ms 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting PVC Loopback The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu gt Test Network PVC Tests Network PVC Loopback DTE d PVC x bo D Network PVC x 98 16186 Main Menu gt Test Data Port PVC Tests Port PVC Loopback DTE PVC x ea a y PVC x Network n H 98 16187 Send Pattern This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests If the selected And the default DLCI is configured as Then Rate Kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears 100 of
139. SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold m SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold m SLV Packet Size Standard The options selected apply to standard FrameSaver SLV measurements utlizing an EDLCI for FrameSaver to FrameSaver communication This option is not available if the SLV Feature is disabed COS 1 COS 7 The options selected apply to this Class of Service Different settings may be saved for each Class of Service SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled This capability requires FrameSaver SLV units at both ends of the PVC running software version 1 2 or higher Display Conditions This option appears only if SLV Type is Standard Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a DLCI is declared Inactive after the configured threshold for SLV Timeout has been exceeded Display Conditions This option appears only if SLV Type is Standard NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far end unit with h
140. Security in Chapter 4 Configuration Options 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 6 13 6 Security and Logins Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the existing login and creating a new one Deleting a Login B gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 6 14 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Operation and Maintenance This chapter includes the following information m Displaying Identity System Information on page 7 2 m Viewing LEDs and Control Leads on page 7 3 LED Descriptions Control Lead Descriptions m Device Messages on page 7 8 m Router CLI Messages on page 7 13 m Status Information on page 7 18 m System and Test Status Messages on page 7 19 Self Test Results Messages Last Reset Health and Status Messages Test Status Messages m P Path Connection Status on page 7 22 m PVC Connection Status on page 7 24 m Network Interface Status on page 7 26 m P Routing Table Management Traffic on page 7 27 m Performance Statistics on page 7 29 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Additio
141. Setting None This read only field shows the possible Code Points Code Points are described in RFC 2474 ID Possible Settings 1 7 Default Setting 1 This read only field shows the ID associated with the Name field If you change a name in a Name field on this screen and select Save the ID changes to match the name Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Default Setting Default The Name field specifies the Class of Service to which you want to assign the Code Point ASCII Text Specifies one of the Class of Service Names entered on the Class of Service Definitions screen December 2002 4 15 4 Configuration Options Configuring Service Level Verification Options SLV options are selected from the System menu These options only appear when SLV is activated in the unit see Advanced SLM Feature Set in Chapter 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices for information about this feature Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Service Level Verification NOTE Options in Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options are not valid when FRF 8 Encapsulation mode is set to Translational see Table 4 12 Network ATM Options for details Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 3 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices Inband communications are used to pass f
142. Settings 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Specifies the level in decibels at which a Signal to Noise Ratio SNR margin alarm condition is declared 5 10 Specifies the threshold level in dB 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 21 4 Configuration Options 4 22 Table 4 9 Network Physical Interface Options 9788 Line Rate Mode Possible Settings AutoRate Fixed Default Setting AutoRate Specifies the mode to be used for rate selection AutoRate The unit automatically detects the line rate from the network interface Fixed The unit uses the line rate specified by DSL Line Rate DSL Line Rate Kbps Possible Settings If PSD Mask is Symmetric 200 264 328 392 456 520 584 648 712 776 784 840 904 968 1032 1096 1160 1224 1288 1352 1416 1480 1544 1552 1608 1672 1736 1800 1864 1928 1992 2056 2120 2184 2248 2312 If PSD Mask is Asymmetric available in future release and Region is Annex A 776 784 1544 1552 If PSD Mask is Asymmetric available in future release and Region is Annex B 2056 2312 Default Setting Depends on settings of Line Rate Mode PSD Mask and Region Determines the rate on the DSL network interface Valid rates and the rates presented on the screen depend on the values of Region and PSD Mask If a change to another configuration option renders the selected DSL Line Rat
143. U only External DTE Loopback is running on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port 1 CSU DSU only The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the user data port This message remains as long as the LL lead is asserted Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off Monitor Pttn Active DLC nnnn frame_relay_link The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the specified frame relay link DLC1 No Test Active No tests are currently running PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link A PVC Loopback is active on the specified frame relay link DLCI Send Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link The unit is sending the selected test pattern on the specified DLCI for the interface Tran Pass Thru Test Active Network 1 9788 only A Transparent Pass Through Loopback Test is active on the specified SHDSL Network Interface IP Path Connection Status 7 22 IP Path Connection Status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status IP Path Connection Status The IP Path Connection Status screen displays the IP Path List a list of devices that can be reached by their IP addresses for Service Level Management purposes The list is displayed in IP address order and includes both static addresses entered using the IP Path List Static configuration screen see Configuring the IP Path List in Chapt
144. Work Areas There are two user work areas m Screen area Where you input information or information is displayed m Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Model Number Date and Time Menu Path main config system slv 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 05 13 2002 23 32 Device Name SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS SLV Sample Interval secs 60 SLV Synchronization Role Tributary SLV Type Standard SLV Delivery Ratio Screen Area lt DLCI Down on SLV Timeout SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold ms SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold Packet Size bytes N Function Keys Area poet to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Save Message Area Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned name for the FrameSaver device Model Number m 9783 C Central site CSU DSU that supports 64 PVCs Feature Set 1 m 9720 9783 9788 Remote site CSU DSU that supports 8 PVCs m 9783 Rtr 9788 Rtr Router that supports 8 PVCs Model Number m 9783 C SLV Central site CSU DSU that supports 64 PVCs and has the Advanced SLM Feature Set installed Advanced SLM Feature Set m 9720 SLV 9783 SLV 9788 SLV Remote site CSU DSU that supports 8 PVCs and has the Advanced SLM Feature Set installed
145. ach transmitted data character is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and the corresponding parity bit even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and the corresponding parity bit odd December 2002 4 59 4 Configuration Options 4 60 Table 4 25 Communication Port Options 2 of 4 Stop Bits Possible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of COM port stop bits 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Display Conditions This option does not apply to the router Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password login are required to log on to the async terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user
146. ady been created The static route table is full An attempt was made to assign an IP address but the maximum number of static routes have already been configured The DHCP Server and DHCP Relay cannot both be enabled An attempt was made to enable DHCP Relay and the DHCP Server is already enabled December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 7 4 CLI Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates The DHCP Server and NAT cannot both be enabled An attempt was made to enable the DHCP server and Network Address Translation NAT but they are already enabled The Next Hop IP address is assigned to an interface or sub interface on this device The route entered had a Next Hop IP address that is in the interface s assigned address range TCP UDP port must be 0 65535 The port number entered is outside the specified range Traceroute hops must be between 1 and 128 hops A TraceRoute test was attempted but the maximum hop value is outside the specified range Traceroute packets must be between 0 and 1500 bytes A TraceRoute test was attempted but the packet length is outside the specified range Traceroute timeout must be between 1 and 30 seconds A TraceRoute test was attempted but the timeout value entered was outside the specified range Unable to delete physical interface Physical interfaces cann
147. aintenance menu and clicking on the prompt below Display certificates See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 9 7 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Scheduling Activations You can activate one many or all FrameSaver devices at any time until all the activations ordered for the certificate have been completed NOTE Once Advanced SLV capability is activated in a FrameSaver device the unit cannot be returned to the Diagnostic Feature Set B gt Procedure To schedule device activations 1 9 8 Open the OpenLane SLM application and provide your access level which must be Admin and select Firmware Feature Maintenance from the OpenLane Administration screen Inthe Feature Activations area select Schedule feature verifications activations Follow the steps included on this screen Select the FrameSaver devices to be activated at this time by model device name or IP address and click on the prompt below the selection table Entering an asterisk in the Name or Device IP field will display all FrameSaver devices in your system so you can pick and choose devices that will be activated Select whether to activate selected devices Select the FrameSaver devices to be activated at this time under Select devices by model device name or IP address then click on the prompt below the device selection table The table in t
148. al session The router s CLI allows one active session m One Telnet session or m One COM port terminal session December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 6 Security and Logins Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface can be limited by m Requiring a login to the Communications port m Assigning an access level to the port or interface See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about COM port configuration options B gt Procedure To limit asynchronous terminal access to the user interface 1 Select the Communication Port option Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Communication Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login for the User Interface on page 6 13 Limit the access level Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 Ip Evers or levele NOTE A user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level set for the port Keep the access at Level 1 if you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit 3 Save your changes NOTE If you are locked out inadvertently see Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 970
149. als can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV enhanced device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 10 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 About Trend Reports Printed Reports 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCIs on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to FrameSaver Devices 9700 A2 GB20 20 The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver devices m Exception Reports Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify th
150. an be used with the Node IP address for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the IP address class Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 1 Easy Install Configuration Options 2 of 4 TS Access Possible Settings None DLCI VPI VCI DLCI_on_VPI VCI Default Setting Depends on model Specifies the type of Virtual Circuit VC by which special troubleshooting TS access is provided to service providers None No special troubleshooting link is defined DLCI Allows the user to select a frame relay DLCI to be designated for special troubleshooting access VPI VCI Specifies an ATM VC on a specific ATM VPI VCI for TS access It specifies the VPI and VCI on the network interface for service provider troubleshooting ATM data is presumed to be encapsulated according to RFC 1483 see Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 9783 and 9788 on page 4 7 VPI 0 VCI 35 is the default management path between the FrameSaver device and the DSLAM The VPI and VCI are entered separately VPI range is 0 15 VCI range is 32 255 DLCI_
151. ance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI 2 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Inbound Dropped Frames Above CIR Within CIR m Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit This count continues to accumulate until the maximum count value has been reached then the count is reset and starts to accumulate dropped frames again The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 2 7 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Inbound Dropped Characters Above CIR Within CIR m Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximu
152. and Line Interface commands see m Table D 1 Show Commands m Table D 2 Access Control and System Level Commands m Table D 3 CLI Commands For default settings see CL Command Default Settings on page D 6 The minimal characters that must be typed when entering commands are shown in bold for these tables For details on each command and the conventions used for command line syntax see Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations December 2002 D 1 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Show Command Summary D 2 Table D 1 Show Commands lists all of the show or display commands for the CLI Table D 1 Show Commands Command Function show arp Displays all the devices in the router s ARP table show bridge Displays the router s bridge forwarding database entries show configuration Displays the router s current configuration show configuration saved unsaved Shows the current configuration either saved in memory or entered during the current session show rame relay map Shows the status of all frame relay DLCls on the router s frame relay interface show interface intf type intf num sub intf num Shows the status of the specified interface sub interface or all interfaces and sub interfaces for the router show ip dhcp binding ijp address Shows the address bindings associated with the DHCP server m lf an IP address is specifie
153. and carry without discarding frames Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where xis the maximum line rate available on the port 0 maximum Specifies the network committed data rate Tc Possible Settings 1 65535 Default Setting Read Only Displays the DLCl s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds based on the CIR bps and Committed Burst Size Bc Bits settings Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size uses the CIR setting or is entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained December 2002 4 25 4 Configuration Options Table 4 11 Circuit Records Options 3 of 3 Bc Possible Settings 9783 0 2320000 9788 0 2312000 Default Setting 0 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s committed burst size Display Conditions
154. and password are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required use the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 3 Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest level assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only Level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed CAUTION Before changing the session access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the COM port s Port Access Level is
155. anges prior to deleting a sub interface m Delete all route entries destined for the sub interface Delete all route entries destined for the sub interface s subnet ip address range m Delete the IP address or IP unnumbered designation on the sub interface if one exists m Delete the frame relay DLCI on the sub interface if one exists m Delete bridge group assignments from the sub interface m Delete IP NAT inside outside assignments for the sub interface m Delete the IP helper address on the sub interface Sub interface must be specified for Serial interfaces An attempt was made to specify a serial interface without specifying a sub interface Sub interface must be specified for Serial interfaces A serial interface was specified without the sub interface also being specified Sub interface number must be 0 4294967295 The number entered is outside the supported sub interface range Sub interfaces are only supported on the Serial 0 Interface An attempt was made to create a sub interface on the Ethernet port Subnet must be unique The subnet mask for the sub interface entered is not unique The DHCP Server and DHCP Relay cannot both be enabled An attempt was made to enable the DHCP server and DHCP Relay is already enabled The static ARP table is full An attempt was made to create a new ARP entry but the maximum number of static ARP entries have alre
156. another management PVC and try again Limit of PVC Connections reached The maximum number of PVCs has already been created and New was selected from the PVC Connection Table Do not create the PVC connection Delete another PVC connection and try again Name Must be Unique Name entered for a management PVC has been used Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link No Circuits available for Mgmt PVC New was selected from the Management PVCs screen but no unconnected frame relay Link DLCI EDLCI or ATM Link VPI VCI has been defined that can be used in a management PVC Define a new frame relay Link DLCI EDLCI or ATM Link VPI VCI for the management PVC No Destination Link DLCls Available New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but no DLCls are available on the network link Even though DLCls are available to form a connection configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again No DLCls available for connection All configured DLCls have been connected but New was selected from the PVC Connection Table No action needed or configure additional DLCls and try again All Link DLCI pairs have been connected but New was selected from the Management PVCs screen Configure additional network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try again No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC All configured DLCls have been connected but New was sel
157. apsulation 4 45 NMS IP Address 4 51 4 53 6 10 IP Validation 4 51 OpenLane management system 1 9 SNMP Security 4 51 Node IP Address 4 4 4 39 4 42 IP information 4 38 Subnet Mask 4 4 4 39 Nokia DSLAM type 4 4 Number of Managers 4 51 6 10 Trap Managers 4 53 O OCD Out of Cell Delineation 7 21 Delineation 8 9 odd parity 4 59 OID cross reference B 19 alarm B 23 history B 19 numeric order B 23 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 OK control leads 7 7 LEDs 7 5 OpenLane SLM features 1 9 9 2 setting up for FrameSaver devices 9 1 system 1 9 operating mode 4 8 Operating Rate 9720 4 20 Operator CLI Access Level 6 11 ordering Activation Certificates 9 4 organization of this document ix Out of Sync message 8 14 8 20 Outbound Management Priority 4 26 P packet capture 1 6 uploading data 7 48 utility 8 5 packets frames if DE bit set 4 43 pager CLI command C 3 PairGain DSLAM type 4 4 Paradyne DSLAM type 4 4 Parity 4 59 Password 6 13 PAT Port Address Translation C 14 see NAPT 5 8 patents A pattern send monitor interior 8 19 pattern test 8 18 8 20 payload management configuration option 4 42 enable 4 42 Payload Scrambling 4 27 performance statistics 7 29 8 2 ATM 7 38 clearing 7 42 DLCI 7 34 Ethernet 7 41 for Class of Service 7 35 Frame Relay 7 36 OID cross reference B 19 RMON user history 1 5 SLV 7 30 VCC 7 39 xDSL Line 7 40 physical data port
158. arate mutually exclusive elements Enter one element only Braces within brackets indicate a required choice within an optional element Italics Entry is a variable which must be supplied by the operator Bold Entry or the minimum characters that can be entered must be typed as shown X X X X 32 bit IP address and mask information where x is an 8 bit weighted decimal notation XX XX XX XX XX XX MAC address information where x is a hexadecimal notation Main Menu Status Menu selection indicates a selection sequence to be made from a menu e g select Status from the Main Menu Text highlighted in blue A hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 About FrameSaver DSL Devices System Overview 9700 A2 GB20 20 This chapter includes the following System Overview FrameSaver DSL Features on page 1 2 CSU DSU Specific Features Reouter Specific Features Diagnostic Feature Set Advanced SLM Feature Set Network Configuration Examples on page 1 7 OpenLane SLM System on page 1 9 The Paradyne system solution consists of FrameSaver DSL Digital Subscriber Line CSU DSU Channel Service Unit Data Service Unit FrameSaver DSL Router Hotwire ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode Line Card in the Hotwire GranDSLAM or with another vendor s DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexe
159. ardware bypass capability Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded the DLCl s status is changed to Inactive Disable An SLV Timeout Error Event does not affect DLCI status 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 17 4 Configuration Options Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options 3 of 3 SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV packets that must be detected before an SLV Timeout Error Event is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold Available Settings 50 10000 Default Setting 10000 Specifies in milliseconds the 15 sample average round trip latency which must be exceeded before an SLV Latency Threshold alarm event is declared If SLV Type is Standard the latency applies to a multiplexed DLCI If SLV Type is a Class of Service COS 1 COS 7 the latency applies to the COS on an IP Enabled path 50 10000 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Latency Clearing Event Threshold Available Setting
160. as read only December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring SNMP Traps Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps when a trap is generated see Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options 1 of 4 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit For each trap manager to receive trap messages an NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option next option 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the
161. atible DTE may be connected to the port using a DB25 to MS34 adapter X 21 The port is configured as an X 21 compatible DCE An X 21 compatible DTE may be connected to the port using a DB25 to DB15 adapter Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines if the FrameSaver unit clock on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Auto The port will check the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port If necessary the port will automatically phase invert the clock with respect to the transmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock 4 28 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 13 CSU DSU Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by internal transmit clock or external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing this setting causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal
162. ation Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands 1 of 2 ping protocol dest ip source source ip length bytes timeout time interface intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Pings the specified destination address For a successful ping the results are shown as Ping reply x x x x bytes of data packet length Where packet length is the length of echo packets sent For a timeout the results are shown as Ping reply x x x x REQUEST TIMED OUT For an ICMP echo response of unreachable destination the results are shown as Ping reply x x x x DESTINATION UNREACHABLE protocol The protocol of the IP echo message ip dest ip Address of the device to ping source Specify the source IP address source ip The source IP address used in the ping request The default source IP address is the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address The source IP address specified must be an IP address assigned to an interface or sub interface length Specify the length of echo packets sent bytes Number of data bytes Range 0 1500 Default 64 timeout Specify the time in seconds before the ping test is abandoned time Number in seconds before the ping test is abandoned Maximum is 30 seconds Default 5 seconds interface Specify the target interface The default target interface is the interface on which pac
163. ation information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Provides device problem indicators problem resolution alarm conditions troubleshooting and test procedures Chapter 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Identifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver devices are supported Chapter 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device Describes setup of Concord s Network Health application to create reports for FrameSaver devices Appendix A Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the menu driven user interface screens are organized Appendix B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported lists the device s compliance with SNMP format standards and special operational trap features describes the RMON specific user history groups and presents alarm and event defaults Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Describes the configuration options available on the FrameSaver DSL Router and the minimum access level for each command Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Provides a summary of commands with abbreviated syntax that can be entered and the default setting for each command Appendix E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the unit s rea
164. aver DSL 9783 Remote CSU DSU with SLM 8 9788 A1 221 FrameSaver DSL 9788 Remote CSU DSU with SLM 64 9783 A1 223 FrameSaver DSL 9783 Central Site CSU DSU with SLM 64 9783 A1 224 FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router with SLM 8 9788 A1 224 FrameSaver DSL 9788 Router with SLM ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path and Channel Identifier VPI VCl in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped Frame Relay Traffic Policing Ensures proper alignment and correlation of CIR values between the FrameSaver unit and the frame relay interworking function on the network switch Using the same method as the switch frames that exceed CIR are tagged as Discard Eligible and frames that exceed excess burst size are discarded RMON User History Performance Statistics via SNMP Polling Provides access to physical interface and basic frame relay performance statistics via SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol polling These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB Management Information Base and historically as an RMON2 Remote Monitoring Version 2 User History object Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device and network problems including nondisruptive PVC loopbacks and end to end connectivity Tests can be commanded from the devic
165. ayer Tx Octets Number of AAL5 octets transmitted on the VCC Rx Octets Number of AAL5 octets received on the VCC Errored Rx PDUs Number of AAL5 PDUs received that contained errors Errors include CRC 32 errors SAR timeout errors and oversized errors OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance Total Tx OAM Cells Number of OAM cells transmitted on the VCC Total Rx OAM Cells Number of OAM cells received on the VCC Tx Segment Loopback Cells Number of OAM segment loopback cells transmitted on the VCC Rx Segment Loopback Cells Number of OAM segment loopback cells received on the VCC Tx EndToEnd Loopback Cells Number of OAM end to end cells transmitted on the VCC Rx EndToEnd Loopback Cells Number of OAM end to end cells received on the VCC Tx AIS Cells Number of OAM F5 Alarm Indication Signal AIS cells transmitted on the VCC December 2002 7 39 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 18 VCC Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Rx AIS Cells Number of OAM F5 AIS cells received on the VCC Tx RDI Cells Number of OAM F5 Remote Defect Indication RDI cells transmitted on the VCC Rx RDI Cells Number of OAM F5 RDI cells received on the VCC SHDSL Line Performance Statistics 9788 7 40 Access SHDSL statistics from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics
166. ble Specify the number 1 10 of SNMP Number of Managers to management systems that are authorized to the desired number send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Specify the IP address es that identifies the NMS n IP Address to SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP the appropriate NMS IP address messages to the unit Specify the access allowed for an authorized Access Level to NMS when IP address validation is performed Read or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options 6 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 6 Security and Logins Controlling Router CLI Access The FrameSaver DSL Router can be managed from an NMS using SNMP or from the router s command line interface CLI There are two methods to access the command line interface m Local access at the DSL router through the COM port or m Access via a Telnet session Telnet access defaults to Administrator level If the current login is at the Operator level only Operator level access is available for the session Telnet access is always enabled The router accepts one CLI login session at a time and is configured at the factory without a default login ID and password To provide login security to the DSL system configure a login ID and password When a local console connection is first established a login prompt a
167. ble the prompt Would you like to set the Node s Default IP Destination to Ethernet appears If Yes is selected the Ethernet interface is enabled and the node s Default IP Destination is set to Ethernet If No Esc or Ctrl a are selected the Ethernet interface is enabled but the node s Default IP Destination is not changed m f Status is changed from Enable to Disable the prompt Would you like to clear the Ethernet Management Options appears If Yes is selected the Ethernet management link is disabled and all Ethernet Management options are reset to their default values If No Esc or Ctrl a are selected the Ethernet management link is disabled Enable The Ethernet interface is active for management traffic and can only receive Version 2 or IEEE 802 3 MAC frames and transmit Version 2 MAC frames Disable The Ethernet interface is not available for management traffic and No alarms or traps associated with the Ethernet management interface are generated m All port uses that refer to the Ethernet interface like Default IP Destination and Initial Route Destinations are reset to their default settings see Table 4 18 Node IP Options and Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 57 4 Configuration Options 4 58 Table 4 24 Ethernet Management Options 2 of 2 IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223
168. ble C 17 UDP Port Designations December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Pager Command C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations The pager command allows you to enable or disable screen paging for a CLI session and enter comments at the command line which is useful when adding comments within scripts Table C 1 Pager Command no pager Minimum Access Level modes Operator Command Mode All modes Allows you to control the flow of uninterrupted output to the screen Information added after the at the command line is ignored pager Enables display paging When enabled and there are more than 23 lines to display more displays on line 24 This is the default each time a session is started Press the Spacebar to view the next screen Press the Enter key to display the next line Press the q key Ctrl c or any other key to return to the command line no pager Disables paging and the entire output is sent to the screen without interruption Access Control Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 Access control commands allow you to end a session For password and changing access commands see Controlling Router CLI Access in Chapter 6 Security and Logins Table C 2 Access Control Commands end Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode All config modes Allows you to exit any configuration mode and return to standard operating mode exit Minimum Access Level Operator
169. ble lists cables you can order G Equipment List Cable 15 feet 4 5 meters For connection to an external device Description Part Number Feature Number IDSL SDSL or SHDSL Network Cable with 035 0209 2031 3100 F 1 500 8 Pin RJ48C type Connectors 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in the U S For a DB25 to DB9 connection m DB25 to 8 Pin Modular Adapter 002 0069 0033 3100 F 1 920 m 8 Pin Modular to DB9 Cable 035 0313 1431 3100 F2 550 14 feet 4 2 meters For connection to an external device with a DB9 connector Standard DB25 to DB25 EIA 232 D Crossover 035 0222 1531 4951 035F DB25 to MS34 EIA 530 A to V 35 Cable or DB25 to MS34 EIA 530 A to V 35 Adapter 035 0244 0031 or 002 0095 0131 3100 F 1 570 or 3100 F 1 572 DB25 to DB15 EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter 035 0302 0131 3100 F 1 571 December 2002 G 5 G Equipment List G 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index Numerics 55 hexadecimal test pattern 8 19 8 20 A aborting tests 8 17 Access CLI and configuration 1 3 control commands C 3 controlling CLI 6 11 Dial In 4 63 Easy 4 3 limiting COM port 6 4 FTP 6 6 or disabling SNMP 6 8 over TS Management Link 6 7 router CLI 6 11 Telnet 6 5 limiting SNMP through IP addresses 6 10 Name 4 46 4 47 to the router s CLI 2 6 TS 4 5 TS Management Link 4 40 Type 4 52 Access Level 6 10 6 13 assigning Community Names and 6 9 changing 6 12 CLI c
170. c address arp type no arp ip address mac address arp type arp timeout time no arp timeout time bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time protocol span tree protocol priority span tree priority route route protocol no bridge crb bridge group acquirelaging time aging time priority span tree priority route route protocol no bridge group bridge group no bridge group bridge group input type list in access list 200num output type list out access list 200num clear arp cache clear counters intf type intf num sub intf num clear ip nat translations default router jp address no default router jp address dns server ip address no dns server ip address domain name domain name no domain name domain name December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Table D 3 CLI Commands 2 of 2 Command encapsulation encapsulation type encapsulation protocol no rame relay interface dici dici num interface intf type intf num sub intf num point to point no interface intf type intf num sub intf num point to point ip address jp addr subnet mask no ip address jp addr subnet mask no ip access group access list 1 199num in out no ip dhcp pool pool name ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients no ip dhcp relay max
171. ch on a multiplexed DLCI being used for automatic network DLCI from Multiplexed to but frame relay is okay DLCI and PVC Standard turning off multiplexing configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant 8 12 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 ATM Problems 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 8 3 ATM Problems 8 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Out of Cell Delineation OCD events loss of cell delineation Line impairments Check DSLAM statistics Reduce the link rate The unit should be receiving data but the ATM statistics indicate that the VCs are not receiving data The Virtual Circuit VC is improperly configured or not configured in the DSLAM Check DSLAM statistics Configure the VC December 2002 8 13 8 Troubleshooting Frame Relay PVC Problems Table 8 4 Frame Relay PVC Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Losing Data Frame relay network is experiencing problems Run PVC Loopback and Pattern tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider No receipt or transmission of data Cross connections of the DLCl s are configured incorrectly Verify the PVC connections and DLCls by checking the network discovered DLCls on the LMI Reported DLCls screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is misconf
172. cludes short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors This number does not include LMI errors There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames Number of invalid frames received over the interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Short Rx Frames Number of frames received over the interface that were less than 5 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Long Rx Frames Number of frames received over the interface that were more than 8196 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI Number of frames sent to invalid DLCls not 16 1007 Unknown DLCI Number of frames received for unknown DLCls Unknown Error Number of frames received that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories The unit cannot recognize the error December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay LMI CSU DSUs only LMI Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received Number of LMI status messages received over the int
173. d only bindings for that client will be displayed m If no IP address is specified all DHCP server bindings are displayed show ip nat translations Displays all the address bindings associated with the DHCP server show ip route ip address Shows the Routing Table entry for the device with the specified IP address or all Routing Table entries if no IP address is specified show ip traffic Shows IP statistics for the router show spanning tree Displays the router s spanning tree topology December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts Access Control and System Level Command Summary 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table D 2 Access Control and System Level Commands lists of all of the access control and system level commands for the CLI Table D 2 Access Control and System Level Commands Command Function 2 Displays all valid commands for the current access level Used to enter comments Comments following the are ignored by the CLI configure terminal factory Enters configuration mode so configuration options can be edited disable Exits Administrator access level enable Enters enables the Administrator access level enable password password no enable password password Sets or disables the password level Default is None end Leaves configuration mode to return to standard operating m
174. d to a global address and port for PAT Static inside and outside destination translations are not supported static ip addr1 Specifies the first IP address in the static route For inside source translation this is the local address to be mapped static ip addr2 Specifies the second IP address in the static route For inside source translation this is the global address to be mapped protocol Protocol that applies to this static route which include tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol static port num Specifies the second TCP UDP port in a static protocol route For inside source translation this is the local port It should only be specified when a static protocol translation is specified Only one static route per protocol can specify a static port num The valid range of TCP UDP ports is 1 65535 clear ipnat translation Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode Standard Allows you to clear all dynamic NAT translations from the translation table December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations DHCP Server Commands Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server commands are used to enable or disable the DHCP server and create or delete a DHCP pool Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands 1 of 3 no service dhcp Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to enable or disable th
175. dFrames etn conigued OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag frCircuitSentFrames hia eoniguiea OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D 1 A Absolute value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Jin the OID Interface ID for the frame relay link D DLCI number 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 D Delta The calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB B 17 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Threshold Default Sample Event Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Rising Falling Maximum D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 60 secs O Maximum 0 Larene Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 fin capability OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Missing D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 5 5 a Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs nin OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Rx BECNs D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Rising 1 1 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs min OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx DLCI Link D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 min capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx FECNs D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Rising 1 1
176. day 4 digit year format and or time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid time must be hh mm ss An invalid system time was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid Already Active A selected test was already in progress No action is needed Invalid Password Login is required and an incorrect password was entered access is denied m Try again m Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test Combination When Start was selected a conflicting loopback or pattern test was in progress or was active on the same or another interface Wait until other test ends and message Clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path Main Test m Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from Limit of six Login IDs reached Attempting to enter a new login ID and the limit of six login password combinations has been reached m Delete another login password combination m Reenter the new login ID 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 9 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 3 Device Messages 3 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Limit of Mgmt PVCs reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of management PVCs has already been created Do not create the management PVC Delete
177. dem 4 63 connector for 9720 and 9788 E 5 connector for 9783 E 5 limiting access 6 4 Command Line Interface CLI 2 1 commands C 1 commands ARP C 11 bridge C 9 CLI C 1 CLI access control C 3 CLI configuration C 4 DHCP relay agent C 18 server C 15 diagnostic C 23 external modem 4 63 filter access list C 19 interface C 5 IP routing C 8 NAT C 12 pager C 3 show C 25 Committed Burst Size Bc Bits 1 4 4 25 4 33 Information Rate CIR 4 25 4 33 interval 4 25 Rate Measurement Interval Tc 1 4 Communication setting up Management and 4 38 Communication Port 4 59 Community Name 4 46 4 47 assigning 6 9 Concord s Network Health compatibility 1 1 10 1 9700 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Auto 1 4 CLI access and 1 3 CLI commands C 4 displaying and changing options 3 4 Edit Display menu 3 2 FTP transfer rate 1 4 menu 2 4 NAPT example 5 8 NAT example 5 6 network examples 1 7 of router using terminal emulation 5 18 option areas 3 3 option tables 4 9 saving changes 3 5 Scratchpad area 3 3 using a DSL router in your network 1 8 unit in your network 1 7 configuring added SLV units elements 10 4 ATM 4 27 Circuit Records 4 23 Code Point definitions 4 15 COM port 4 59 to support a modem 4 63 CSU DSU s dataport 4 28 data and virtual router ports 4 28 DLCI records manually 4 32 Ethernet management 4 57 external modem E 11 Frame Relay and LMI for the CSU DSU 4 10 for
178. ditional information about this feature 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 5 8 Troubleshooting Viewing LMI Captured Packets from the User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface Control LMI Packet Capture Utility Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control 1lmi_capture display_log 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 2 26 2001 08 01 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Net1 FR1 Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided for the LMI Trace Log m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 s seconds The display is reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The capt
179. down DSL DSL Link Status Green ON The DSL link is ready to transmit and receive data OFF The DSL link has not been established Blinking The DSL link is training Port LED CSU DSU OK Port Status Green ON The user data port is up and ready for operation OFF No device is detected on the user data port Port LED Router OK Interface Status Green ON The Ethernet port is up and ready for operation OFF No device is detected on the Ethernet port Control Lead Descriptions In addition to these LEDs additional control leads can be monitored through the Display LEDs amp Control Leads screen They are described in Table 7 2 Control Leads Port 1 leads do not apply to a router 7 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 2 Control Leads Label Indication What It Means General OK Operational The device s hardware and firmware are operational Alarm Alarm Present The device has detected a fault that may interfere with operation Test Test in Progress The unit is in a maintenance mode such as a loopback test ATM Mode ATM Mode is Active The unit is configured for ATM operation The 9783 front panel ATM LED is on 9788 Network Interface 9783 9788 Data Mode Data Mode Active The unit has trained up and is operating in normal data mode The f
180. ds If any DLCI records exist you may enter a DLCI number at the bottom of the screen to display copy from or modify a DLCI record Select CreatePVC to create a new PVC based on an existing DLCI record Table 4 11 Circuit Records Options 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 1023 with numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 Ifthe DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES Ifa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing this setting causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number VPI VCI Number Possible Settings For the VPI 0 15 For the VCI 32 255 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the VPI and VCI Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 0 15 forthe VPI and Value Out of Range 32 255 for the VCI The VPI VCI must be unique on the ATM link 0 15 Specifies the VPI 32 255 Specifies the VCI 4 24 December 2002 9
181. dyne Enable 9783 If DSLAM Type is set to a non Paradyne DSLAM Disable 9788 Enable Specifies whether the 48 byte information field of ATM cells is scrambled descrambled per ANSI T1 646 on this ATM link NOTE For the 9783 CSU DSU the default setting is changed based upon the DSLAM Type setting See DSLAM Type 9783 on page 4 4 for more information Enable Activates scrambling descrambling of transmitted or received ATM cells Disable No scrambling descrambling is performed Cell Delineation Error Event Threshold Possible Settings 1 1000 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of OCD Out of Cell Delineation events that must occur in a one minute interval for an LCD Loss of Cell Delineation alarm to be declared 1 1000 Specifies the LCD alarm threshold FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode Possible Settings Translational Transparent Default Setting Transparent Specifies the type of FRF 8 upper layer protocol encapsulation used on the link for each pair of interoperable Frame Relay and ATM PVCs Translational Encapsulated data is translated RFC 1490 to RFC 1483 FrameSaver multiplexing and SLV communications are not supported in this mode Transparent Encapsulated data is forwarded without being translated ILMI Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies the state of the Integrated Local Management Interface ILMI ILMI can be
182. e NOTE When IP routing is disabled all static route entries are deleted However adding new route entries while IP routing is disabled is not prevented no ip multicast routing Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Enables or disables the forwarding of IP multicast packets The default is Disable December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Bridge Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Bridge commands are used to enable or disable simultaneous bridging and routing configuration of bridge groups and their attributes and apply or remove bridge groups from an interface or sub interface To show the bridge database or spanning tree topology see Table C 13 Show Commands Table C 6 Bridge Commands 1 of 2 bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time protocol span tree protocol priority span tree priority route route protocol no bridge crb bridge group acquire aging time aging time priority span tree priority route route protoco Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config A user can enable or disable simultaneous bridging and routing and configure attributes associated with a bridging group Bridge group 1 is created by default with a priority of 32768 and configured as a learning bridge utilizing the IEEE 802 1 spanning tree protocol Simultaneous routing and bridging is disabled by default
183. e s menu driven user interface or the OpenLane system These tests include ATM segment and end to end loopbacks December 2002 1 5 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices Trap Event Log Shows the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol trap event log for the FrameSaver unit with the most recent events first keeping a running total for all trap events stored the amount of time since the event was logged plus a description of the trap LMI Packet Capture Provides a way of uploading LMI data that has been captured on the user data port in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface When viewed from the menu driven user interface the 12 most recent LMI messages are displayed Enhanced Ping Operation FrameSaver devices can check connectivity and roundtrip response time to any remote device in either direction via the FrameSaver internal management network or the data path Payload Management Any standard non management DLCI can be designated as payload managed providing management directly from a user data PVC and support for Telnet ping SNMP and FTP Endpoint identification FrameSaver units can identify all destination units via a specified Circuit DLCI or VPI VCl Third party destinations non FrameSaver units may be manually configured as endpoints Class of Service Up to 7 Class of Service COS types are supported
184. e The default is that IP processing is disabled Example ip unnumbered When an interface IP address and subnet mask are deleted via the no ip unnumbered command any routing entries with a Next Hop Router address that fall within the interface s address range are deleted automatically no frame relay interface dlci dici num Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config subif Specifies or removes a DLCI on a sub interface configured for frame relay encapsulation Only one DLCI may be configured per sub interface Example frame relay interface dlci 103 dici num Any valid DLCI number that is not already in use on the interface Range for DLCI numbers is 16 1007 The default is None December 2002 C 7 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations IP Routing Commands C 8 Internet Protocol IP routing commands are used to enable and disable IP routing and to create or delete static routes in the routing table To show IP routing and performance statistics see Table C 13 Show Commands Table C 5 IP Routing Commands ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num no ip route dest ip dest mask next hop ip intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows manual creation or deletion of static route entries There are no route entries by default A default gateway destination route may
185. e DHCP server The DHCP server is enabled by default but is not active until other DHCP server options are configured When an IP address is assigned to a host by the DHCP Server and there is no matching routing table entry a host entry for that IP address is created This entry is deleted from the routing table when the lease expires or the IP address is relinquished When an IP address is assigned to a host on the local Ethernet by the DHCP Server an ARP table entry is created mapping that IP address to the corresponding host MAC address This entry is deleted from the ARP table when the lease expires or the IP address is relinquished This entry is not deleted according to the timeout mechanism that applies to normal ARP entries NOTE The DHCP Relay and DHCP Server cannot be enabled at the same time no ip dhcp pool pool name Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to create or delete a DHCP pool and places it in DHCP pool configuration mode to configure IP DHCP pool parameters All commands entered while in DHCP pool configuration mode are applied to the specified DHCP pool No DHCP pools are configured by default Example ip dhcp pool pool17 pool name The name of the DHCP pool as 1 20 ASCII printable characters no ip dhcp excluded address ip addr end ip addr Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to specify a single IP address or a range o
186. e Definitions screen See Configuring Class of Service Definitions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options COS ID The ID numbers 1 7 of the Class of Service definitions Last RdTrip Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the DLCI connection appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Min RdTrip Minimum round trip latency measured over the last 15 samples between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the DLCI connection appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Avg RdTrip Average round trip latency between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size as shown in Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 samples If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Max RdTrip Same as average Avg RdTrip but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 samples appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has
187. e Internet host The local hosts continue to use their corporate or private addresses When the hosts are communicating with each other the translation is based on the IP address and the IP port numbers used by TCP IP applications Only TCP UDP applications can access the public network NAPT Configuration Example NAPT Example Ethernet Private Network Public IP Public Network 1 FrameSaver xDSL Router 01 16947 In this NAPT example the router is configured for NAPT using m A single public IP address Multiple public addresses can be used m A public network NAPT can also be used between private networks m An access list A pool can also be used instead or in addition NAPT Mapping Public IP Address Private IP Addresses 172 20 95 2 222z 10 1 3 2 222z 172 20 95 2 yyyy 10 1 3 3 yyyy 172 20 95 2 xxxx 10 1 3 4 xxxx December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router p gt Procedure To set up NAPT 1 From the Main Menu screen press Ctrl a then Shift r to access the router s Command Line Interface Set up an access list The following command specifies a list that includes addresses 10 1 3 1 through 10 1 3 254 access list 1 permit 10 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 Enable NAPT The following command specifies that inside address translation is performed on the addresses in Access List 1 and the outside address
188. e at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency and FDR DDR performance statistics are collected The Frame Relay Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered frames offered frames the Data Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered octets offered octets If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected Table 7 12 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI 1 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLCI number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number 0 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a Responses response from the far end device has not been received 7 30 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 12 SLV Perform
189. e families Some of the OpenLane system s features include m Easy to use Web browser based user interface Optional integration with HP OpenView m Device configuration through the Web interface Real time device health and status diagnostics and performance monitoring m Extensive Web based diagnostics including non disruptive PVC loopback and end to end connectivity testing m Real time performance graphs and historical SLV graphs m Service level management historical reports including Frame Delivery Ratio Detail Frame Transfer Delay Detail Availability Detail Network Capacity and Throughput Detail PVC Tx Activity by CIR Detail Protocol Distribution Detail Top 6 IP Communicator Distribution PVC Congestion Detail DTE Port Errors Network Port Errors Port Trend Analysis PVC Trend Analysis SLV Detail m Diagnostic troubleshooting tests including end to end connectivity and nondisruptive PVC ATM and frame relay loopbacks m Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery Ability to reset FrameSaver DSL devices from the OpenLane system m Firmware download to a single device or an entire network m On demand polling of FrameSaver devices December 2002 1 9 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices 1 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation This chapter explains how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface and
190. e g 0 35 Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard DLCI can be used An assigned security level can control access and is recommended When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the message Note This PVC has been designated as the TS Access Management Link Select Node IP from the Management and Communication menu Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication Node IP 4 38 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 18 Node IP Options 1 of 2 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than 223 Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address subnet mask that is needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a partic
191. e invalid the Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate Display Conditions DSL Line Rate does not appear if DSL Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate 200 2312 The DSL line rate is set to the specified rate in Kbps Region Possible Settings Annex A Annex B Default Setting Depends on model Determines the annex of the G 991 2 recommendation that the unit will conform to The value of Region in part determines what DSL Line Rates are available If a change in the Region renders the current DSL Line Rate invalid the Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate Annex A The unit conforms to Annex A for North America Annex B The unit conforms to Annex B for Europe PSD Mask Possible Settings Symmetric Default Setting Symmetric Read only Specifies the Power Spectral Density PSD mask the unit will use The value of PSD Mask in part determines what DSL Line Rates are available If a change in the PSD Mask setting available in a future release renders the current DSL Line Rate invalid the Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate Asymmetric Future use The unit uses the asymmetric PSD mask Symmetric The unit uses the symmetric PSD mask December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring Frame Relay for the Network Interface Select Frame Relay from the Network menu to display or change the network Frame Relay options see Table 4 10 Network Frame Relay Options
192. e is unavailable IP_Address is the IP address of the path endpoint Interface is P1 Port 1 or N1 Network 1 and nnnn is the DLCI which contains the path SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn Port 1 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data Does not apply toa TS Management Link DLCI When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition exists only EDLCI 0 user data will be transmitted SNR Margin Threshold Exceed Network 1 The user specified SNR margin threshold has been exceeded Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Two Level 1 users are already using the menu driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 21 nce 7 Operation and Maintena Test Status Messages Test status messages listed in Table 7 7 Test Status Messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option to continue the test or to abort the test See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 7 7 Test Status Messages Message What It Indicates 511 Pattern Test Active A 511 pattern test is active on the SHDSL network Network 1 interface 9788 only DTE External LB Active Port 1 CSU DS
193. e of the roundtrip time The fifth column is the IP address of the responding system If no response is received for a hop the last column is blank protocol The protocol of the echo message for TraceRoute ip dest ip Address of the device to TraceRoute source The source IP address The default source IP address is the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address source ip The source IP address used in the TraceRoute test The default source IP address will be the IP address for the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address The source IP address specified must be an IP address assigned to an interface or sub interface length Specify the length of packets sent bytes Number of data bytes Range 0 1500 Default 64 timeout Specify the time in seconds before the TraceRoute test is abandoned time Number of seconds before the TraceRoute test is abandoned Range 1 30 Default 5 seconds hops Specify the maximum number of hops to be tested hops The maximum number of hops to be tested Range 1 128 Default 8 interface Specify the target interface The default target interface is the interface on which packets are routed to the destination IP address intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface SDSL network interface intf num The in
194. e the cursor one position to the left q Abort a Move display and return to the command line prompt or any key but Spacebar or Enter Return 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 2 9 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation 2 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Procedures 9700 A2 GB20 20 While it is easiest to configure FrameSaver devices using the OpenLane SLM system you can configure the FrameSaver DSL CSU DSUs and routers using the menu driven user interface This chapter includes the following m Basic Configuration From the User Interface on page 3 2 Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options December 2002 3 1 3 Configuration Procedures Basic Configuration From the User Interface Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver DSL device operates Use the unit s Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings Configuration Edit Display Menu 9783 C SLV 2 26 2001 03 01 main config Device Name Node A CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network Data Ports Pvc Connections Management and Communication Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Save 3 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 3 Configuration Procedures Configuration Option Areas 9700 A2 GB20 20 The FrameSaver device arrive
195. e user data port as the source link Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link Clear All Clears all Link and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCls Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCl for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option appears only when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number and is not applicable when FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode is set to Translational see Table 4 12 Network ATM Options 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number December 2002 4 35 4 Configuration Options 4 36 Table 4 16 PVC Connections 2 of 2 Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the frame relay interface used as the destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid sett
196. eSaver unit router or NMS to which it has a route In addition the test can be run to access a remote unit for configuration purposes Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are m To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in the network to verify that the path is operational Select IP Ping Test Procedure 1 to ping any far end FrameSaver unit m To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site installation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select P Ping Test Procedure 2 on page 8 29 to ping the NMS at the central site m To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the Ping Select IP Ping Test Procedure 2 on page 8 29 to ping SNMP trap managers Ping Screen Example main test ping 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 09 11 2002 06 12 IP PING Target IP Address 000 000 000 000 Destination Interface Use Internal Route DLCI 100 Net1 ATM 15 255 Source IP Address Special 135 90 25 1 Encapsulation Routed TOS Byte User Defined 001101 Packet Size Iteration Count Inter ping Delay sec Res
197. eading Ox used to specify one of the Ethernet type codes This option only applies for protocol type code access lists 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 C 21 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 11 Filter Commands 4 of 4 no ip access group access list 1 199num in out Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Allows you to control access to an interface by allowing you to designate or delete a set of access rules to be applied to either incoming or outgoing packets By default no access lists are applied to interfaces Example ip access group 17 in NOTE A user may specify that an access list is applied to either inbound packets outbound packets or both inbound and outbound packets two commands If a specified access list does not exist all packets are passed access list 1 199num The access list number The valid ranges for access lists are 1 99 Standard IP access lists 100 199 Extended IP access lists in Specifies that filters will be applied to inbound packets out Specifies that filters will be applied to outbound packets If no direction in or out is specified the filter is applies to outbound packets by default C 22 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Diagnostic Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 Diagnostic commands allow you to ping or trace the route to a specified destin
198. ecember 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to configure trap managers see Table 4 22 SNMP NMS Security Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security A table displays with the network management systems with their respective IP addresses allowed access to the SNMP FrameSaver unit Table 4 22 SNMP NMS Security Options 1 of 2 NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear
199. ecipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI diciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link linkName dlciNumber is the DLCI number DLC diciNumber circuitld only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap circuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string or a 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay linkName only appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Examples DLCI 100 Chicago to New York of Network DSL frame relay link In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap Typically the circuitld is a coded string encoded by the network service provider The following shows an example DLCI 100 cc0402 dec0704 RG21 of Network DSL frame relay link The unit supports the following traps Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Trap linkUp and linkDown Trap enterprise Specific Trap RMON Specific These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Trap warmStart B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm
200. ecords 3 of 3 Excess Burst Size Be Bits Possible Settings 9720 0 144000 9783 0 2320000 9788 0 2312000 Default Setting 9720 144000 9783 2320000 9788 2312000 Specifies the maximum line rate on the port the amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames 0 maximum Specifies the DLCI s excess burst size DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as QoS All data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface applies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCIs on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available for data ports Low
201. ected from the Management PVCs screen Configure additional network and or Port 1 DLCls and try again No DLCls Defined DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit menu and no DLCI Records have been created for this interface Select New and create a DLCI record No more DLCls allowed New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records screen and the maximum number of DLCI Records had already been reached Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 3 Device Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do No Primary New or Modify was selected Configure additional DLCls for the Destination Link DLCls from the PVC Connection network link and try again If a Available Table but even though network DLCI has been entered DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI toa user data port DLCI 2 Enter the network DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination No Security Records to Delete Delete was selected from the Administer Logins screen and no login exists m No action is needed m Enter a security record Password Matching Error Re enter Password Password entered in the Re enter Password field of the Admini
202. ed Logins must be unique and are case sensitive Up to six login ID password combinations can be created and each login ID has a specified access level B gt Procedure To create a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control Administer Logins 2 Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter Login ID 1 to 10 ASCII characters Password 1 to 10 ASCII characters Re enter Password Password verification Access Level m Level 1 Top level User can add change and display configuration options save changes and run device tests All functions from the Main Menu are available m Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics and display status and configuration option information Main menu displays Status Test and Configuration m Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens Main menu displays Status and Configuration only CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set up for Level 1 access so you are not inadvertently locked out NOTE If you are locked out see Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 3 Save your changes You must save on this screen for updates to be valid When Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry For information about SNMP security options see Configuring SNMP NMS
203. ed from one interface to another Independent The LMI state for each interface is handled separately and is not affected by the LMI state of the other interface Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 The LMI state for the Net1 FR1 interface follows the state of the LMI of the Port 1 interface If the LMI is down on the Port 1 interface the system brings down the LMI on the Net1 FR1 interface and when the LMI is up on Port 1 the system brings up the LMI on the Net1 FR1 Interface This setting is useful at a central site when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Brings down LMI on Port 1 when there is a physical failure on the network interface When the alarm on the network interface is cleared Port 1 is re enabled and its control leads are reasserted This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 The LMI state for Port 1 and the Net1 FR1 interface are dependent on each other If the LMI is down on either interface the system will bring the LMI down on the other interface When the LMI is up on either interface the system will bring the LMI up on the other interface 4 10 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table
204. elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of devices entered and the size of your network it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network 4 Save the search results Saving the search results creates poller configuration definitions to be used to poll the devices See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 10 3 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the device for the first time For a FrameSaver device the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required but verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If a FrameSaver device does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the unit s CIR to 0 Kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the unit s CIR before Network Health polls it If O Kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the unit s CIR from Network Health See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information configuration and editing B gt Procedure To change the FrameSaver device s CIR unit elements from Netw
205. en Start If both tests are successful the VC has been tested from end to end Provisioning the Router Interface The FrameSaver DSL Router defaults to bridge mode Routing without bridging and simultaneous routing and bridging are also options Use the bridge command from the router s CLI to configure the bridge and routing attributes Also enter an Ethernet IP address and a DHCP IP address Refer to Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations for command line syntax and information about CLI commands For a list of default settings see CL Command Default Settings in Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 5 17 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation The CLI is available via a Telnet session or a direct connection over the router s COM port to a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program You access the CLI through the router s menu driven user interface From the Main Menu press Shift r to access the CLI Verify the required terminal settings Data rate is set to 19 2 Kbps 19200 bps Character length is set to 8 Parity is set to None Stop bits is set to 1 Flow control is set to Off or None Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI 5 18 Use the show configuration command to output command strings needed to restore the current running configurati
206. enLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 055 Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System 00 0c eee Setting Up FrameSaver Support 0 000 eee eee eee Ordering Advanced SLM Feature Set Activations To Find Your License Key Number 00 000 The Activation Certificate 2 0 nee December 2002 Contents Contents m Administering and Managing Advanced SLM Activations 9 6 Entering an Activation Certificate 00 00005 9 7 Checking Activation Certificate Status 000 9 7 Scheduling Activations s es 000 ccc ee 9 8 Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations 9 9 Canceling Scheduled Activations 000000 e ae 9 9 Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report 9 9 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device m Installation and Setup of Network Health 0 005 10 2 m Discovering FrameSaver Elements 00000eeeeeeee 10 3 m Configuring the Discovered Elements 0 000e eres 10 4 m Grouping Elements for Reports 0 0c e eee eee eee 10 5 m Generating Reports fora Group 0000 eee eee 10 6 About Service Level Reports 00 0c eee eee 10 6 About At a Glance Reports 0 0000 eee eee eee 10 6 About Trend Reports 2 0 c eee ee 10 7 Printed Reports rria ee eee 10 7 m Reports Applicable to FrameSaver D
207. ending LMI Protocol Support Automatically detects and initializes the Local Management Interface LMI protocol type on the user data port Router Specific Features The following features only apply to the DSL router m Ethernet Interface Supports user data and management traffic An LED is also provided to view the status of the interface In Band Router Management Permits the router to be managed via customer data PVCs and EDLCls by assigning an IP address for router management that is different from the IP address generally used for the network interface m Inverse ARP for User Data Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support for user data as well as management data The router responds to Inverse ARP requests and can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver device at the far end of a customer PVC ARP information is retained for both customer data and management data 1 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices CLI Access and Configuration Provides a router Command Line Interface CLI along with the menu driven user interface for configuring and managing the router It is accessed from the Main Menu via a direct COM port connection or Telnet The following features are configurable using the CLI NAT Network Address Translation support provides the means to bind IP addresses in a private network to addresses in a public or global network for transpar
208. ent Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Sessions options Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via a TS Management Link to None TS Management Link Assign an access TS Management Link Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 level to the TS Management Link NOTE A user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session To allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about these configuration options 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 6 7 6 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access m Disabling SNMP access m Assigning SNMP community names and the access type m Assigning the IP address of each NMS that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access When the SNM
209. ent routing between the two domains on all PVCs Up to 30 NAT pools are supported Routing table configuration permits configuration of static routes Up to 32 entries can be made IP forwarding to forward multicast IP packets and customer datagrams Filtering on the Ethernet and frame relay interfaces configurable from the CLI access list allows the router to filter MAC frames and prevent unwanted inbound connections Two filter access lists are supported per interface one for the transmit and one for the receive direction The following protocol is supported DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol support for dynamic allocation of IP addresses and automatic cleanup when a subinterface is deleted as well as allowing multiple IP address ranges for DHCP deny capability The DHCP server and relay cannot be enabled at the same time Up to 253 DHCP clients can be supported One DHCP pool of addresses and one IP address range per pool is supported December 2002 1 3 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices Diagnostic Feature Set The following feature set is common to all FrameSaver DSL devices It provides basic FrameSaver frame relay and diagnostic capability which includes the following features Easy Installation When AutoBaud is used no configuration is required SNMP options may be modified to provide security and enable traps Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features ov
210. er 4 Configuration Options and paths discovered as packets are received from other FrameSaver units This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance IP Path Connection Status Screen Example main status path 9783 Device Name Node A 09 11 2002 07 00 FR Link IP PATH CONNECTION STATUS DLCI 201 Device Name IP Address Poughkeepsie 135 026 002 New York 135 026 002 Boston 135 026 002 Los Angeles 026 002 Chicago 026 002 San Francisco 026 002 Milwaukee 026 002 Unknown 010 010 Page 1 of 2 Status Discovery Source Active 135 026 002 005 InActive 135 026 002 005 Active 135 026 002 005 Active 135 026 002 005 Active 135 026 002 005 Active 135 026 002 005 Active 135 026 002 005 Static Active Miami 010 010 ESC for previous menu NextDLCI Static Static Active Active MainMenu Exit PrevDLCI Table 7 8 IP Path Connection Status Field Status What It Indicates FR Link Net1 FR1 Port 1 The frame relay link DLCl 16 through 1007 The IP Enabled DLCI Device Name Up to 20 ASCII The name of the device configured using characters the System Information screen of the Control branch or Unknown if the device is not a FrameSaver IP Address 000 000 000 001 The IP address of the unit at the far end of 255 255 255 255 the path Status The status of the path Active m The path is
211. er entered FrameSaver devices support two sessions simultaneously If two sessions are currently active wait and try again m lf two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet server process returns a Connection refused message at the bottom of the screen m If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit over the COM port using a terminal or external modem not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is displayed In addition the type of connection Telnet Connection or Direct COM Port Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID When the user interface has been idle the unit times out and the session is automatically ended the screen goes blank Press Enter to reactivate the interface See Chapter 6 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins B gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter Fora terminal connected to the COM port the session is ended Fora modem connected to the COM port the session is ended and the modem is disconnected Fora Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from a Configuration menu see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter
212. er profiles Set up historical data collection Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data for FrameSaver devices with the Advanced SLM Feature Set activated See the OpenLane SLM Administrator s Guide and OpenLane online Help to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 9 3 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Ordering Advanced SLM Feature Set Activations When advanced SLV functionality is needed at a site an Activation Certificate Feature No 9720 C1 220 9783 C1 220 or 9788 C1 220 can be ordered which will allow you to activate Advanced SLM features in FrameSaver devices with the Diagnostic Feature Set You must have the OpenLane SLM system Release 5 3 or later to activate Advanced SLV capability in FrameSaver devices and to manage your certificates NOTE If you have a combination of models in your network a separate Activation Certificate must be ordered for each model number Each certificate can be ordered for a single unit or for many units Contact one of the following to request an Activation Certificate m f you are an end user and managing your own network contact your sales representative or distributor m f your network service provider NSP manages the network contact the service provider m If you are a network service provider or distributor contact Paradyne at 1 800 727 2396 www paradyne com via a purchase order
213. er the frame relay network The device s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit diagnostics Real time end to end connectivity test and latency snapshots Troubleshooting DLCI for service provider remote management Basic frame relay statistics Committed Information Rate CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC Router Independence Remote access to diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity are not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is running Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features CIR Determination Recalculates the committed rate measurement interval T and excess burst size Bg when a DLCI s CIR changes Excess Burst Size B and Committed Burst Size B are recalculated when Committed Burst Size B Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement i
214. erface Normal condition Total LMI Errors Number of LMI errors including reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors Number of Inactives Number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link Inactive Frame Relay HDLC E rrors Rx Total Errors Total number of errors received on the interface including m Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors Rx Total Discards Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards Total number of discards received on the interface including m Resource errors m Rx Overruns m Frames received when the link was down m Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls m Unknown EDLCls Rx Overruns Number of Overruns received Rx Non octet Frames Number of Non Octet frames received Rx CRC Errors Number of Cycle Redundancy Check CRC errors received Tx Total Errors Total number of errors transmitted on the interface including transmit discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards Total number of discards transmitted on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns Number of underruns transmitted December 2002 7 37 7 Operation and Maintenance ATM Performance Statistics 9783 9788 7 38 Acce
215. erification DLCI Frame Relay ATM vec xDSL Line 9788 only Ethernet Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Performance statistics counts continue to increment until the maximum value of 232 2 is reached at which time the count starts over NextLink or PgDn and PrevLink or PgUp function keys appear when multiple displays are available 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 29 7 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics The statistics in Table 7 12 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu Status gt Performance Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear m For the network interface m f DLCls are multiplexed or IP Enabled m When the Advanced SLM Feature Set is activated Information displayed on the SLV Performance Statistics screen depends on DLCI type See Table 7 12 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI or Table 7 13 SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI On either screen select PrevDLCI or NextDLCI to view statistics for the previous or next DLCI on the link On the IP Enabled DLCI screen select PrevPath or NextPath to view statistics for the previous or next path associated with the DLCI For standard or multiplexed DLCls the statistics collected by the unit depend upon the devic
216. es Network and synchronous data ports Logical link layer interfaces Frame relay Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates linkDown A failure on one of the communication interfaces has occurred linkUp One of the failed communication interfaces is up and operational The linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Network m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the nine a itAdminstatus are 1573 interface Alarm conditions interfaces Table m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 include m devLastTrapString Loss of signal LOS devHealthAndStatus mib Signal to Noise S N Net Margin Threshold exceeded Strings ifString down e g Network DSL down due to LOS ifString administratively shut down Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up B 8 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and
217. es like frame burst size T Time mask December 2002 B 21 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 LMI Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkSegErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Total Tx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Total Rx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6
218. es with its own MAC address or a broadcast or multicast MAC address Inbridge mode the router accepts all frames and forwards only ones for which the destination MAC address does not match an entry in the bridge table This is the default setting NOTES The configuration examples included in this chapter cover some common configurations providing only a few of the possible scenarios IP addresses used in the examples are for illustrative purposes only they are not intended to be used when configuring your local network Command syntax will vary based on your network setup Configuration commands require an access level of Administrator Config and changes need to be saved when being configured to take effect For additional information refer to Appendix B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for details on the supported MIBs and RFCs Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations for specific commands and complete syntax Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts for specific command default settings and abbreviated command line syntax December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 IP Routing 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router The router uses destination based routing IP routing tables are maintained for both the customer data and management data domains to specify how IP datagrams are forwarded The router can support up to 32 entries in the data IP routing table and up
219. ese functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Router Test Menu Example main test 978x RtrSLV Device Name Node A 6 05 2001 08 03 TEST Network PVC Tests Network ATM Loopback Tests Network Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 15 8 Troubleshooting Network and Data Port PVC Tests do not appear on the Test menu when no PVCs have been configured on the interface Network ATM Loopback Tests does not appear if no ATM links are enabled on the network interface Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane SLM system using its enhanced Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface Test Timeout Feature A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver device is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options i
220. ession to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment 4 Type cd data to change to the data directory If retrieving Then SLY statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file E File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful E File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI packet capture 1 Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility data Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active 2 Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 5 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting 7 48 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting This chapter includes the following 9700 A2 GB20 20 Problem Indicators on page 8 2 Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication on page 8 3 Troubleshooting Management Link Feature on page 8 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature on page 8 5 Telne
221. estored String ifString up 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 B 9 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 10 Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Frame Relay Logical Link Sublayer Represented by entry in MIB II Interfaces Table Synchronous Data Port CSU DSU only Service Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the Frame Relay Extension MIB and media specific Frame Relay Services MIB Network Supported by the Frame Relay Extension MIB and media specific Frame Relay DTE s MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 m ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled If LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely on whether the interface is enabled or disabled Strings ifString LMI down No alarms exist on the link ifString administratively shut down Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up ATM Logical Link Su blayer Network Supported by an entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table m iflndex RFC 1573 m ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m
222. et of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration PVC Connections 2 Make appropriate changes to the configuration option setting s For additional information regarding the user interface see Chapter 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete 4 Save your changes Saving Configuration Options When changing configuration option settings you must Save the changes before they will take effect B gt Procedure To save configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response Ifyou select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved Ifyou select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes normally the Current Configuration and press Enter When the Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen 9700
223. etmask netmask prefix length prefix length no ip nat pool pool name siart ip addr end ip addr netmask netmask prefix length prefix length Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Defines a pool of addresses for Network Address Translation Addresses can then be allocated from the pool as needed Up to 30 NAT pools can be supported To remove a pool use the no ip nat pool command No NAT pools are configured by default Example ip nat pool Largo 132 53 4 2 132 53 4 250 24 pool name Name of the pool comprised of 1 20 ASCII printable characters start ip addr Starting IP address of the range of addresses in the address pool end ip addr Ending IP address of the range of addresses in the address pool netmask Specify a network mask that indicates which address bits belong to the network and subnet fields and which bits belong to the host field netmask Network mask of the network for the pool addresses prefix length or Specify the number of bits in a network mask address that are ones and define the network and subnet fields prefix length The number of bits in a network mask address that are ones Valid range is 1 32 no ip nat inside source list access list 1 99nuM pool pool name overload list access list 1 99num interface intf type intf num sub intf num overload Static static ip addr1 static ip addr2 protocol static ip addr1 static po
224. ets The number of octets in the packets transmitted Rx Packets The number of packets received Rx Octets The number of octets in the packets received Rx Errors The number of packets received in error 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 35 7 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics 7 36 Access frame relay statistics from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance statistics are only displayed for enabled frame relay links Link names may include m Netn FRn frame relay link m Port 1 DSL CSU DSU s user data port number m Ritr SO DSL routers Serial port 0 Table 7 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent Number of frames sent over the frame relay interface Frames Received Number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent Number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received Number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received Number of FECNs received due to data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received Number of BECNs received due to data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Frame Relay Errors Total Errors Total number of frame relay errors in
225. ettings D 6 The following list shows the default settings software version d1 06 04 I no enable password ip routing no ip multicast routing service dhcp ip nat translation timeout 86400 ip dhcp relay max clients 256 bridge 1 acquire bridge 1 aging time 300 bridge 1 protocol ieee bridge 1 priority 32768 interface Ethernet 0 bridge group 1 arp timeout 14400 I interface Serial 0 Encapsulation frame relay ietf bridge group 1 I end December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments This appendix shows the rear panels of the FrameSaver DSL CSU DSUs and routers and the pin assignments for the connectors and cables DSL Network Interface and Cable on page E 4 Model 9783 COM Port Connector on page E 5 Model 9720 and 9788 COM Port Connector on page E 5 Ethernet Port Connector on page E 6 Model 9720 and 9783 CSU DSU Data Port Connector on page E 7 Model 9788 CSU DSU Data Port Connector on page E 8 EIA 530 A to V 35 Adapter on page E 9 EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter on page E 10 In addition this appendix contains the procedure for Configuring an External Modem using a 9700 A2 GB20 20 DB25 to DB25 Crossover Cable on page E 12 DB9 to DB25 Crossover Cable on page E 13 December 2002 E 1 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Rear Panels 299990000 6 OOO000000 02 17312 Figure E 1 Model 9720 CSU DSU Rear Pane
226. etwork Addresses 01 16924 In this DHCP Server with NAT example m The clients are using dynamic IP address assignment and use the Ethernet interface of the router as the next hop router default gateway m The DHCP server assigns private IP addresses which are converted to public IP addresses by NAT m The DSL interface must be numbered m The router is configured as the DHCP server giving the private IP addresses to the clients m The Ethernet interface is in private address space NAT is used for one to one mapping of addresses Public IP Addresses for NAT Private IP Addresses 192 128 22 1 10 1 3 2 192 128 22 2 10 1 3 3 192 128 22 nnn 10 1 3 nnn The command line syntax for this example where xis the number configured for the sub interface is ip nat pool public 192 128 22 1 netmask 255 255 255 0 access list 1 permit 10 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 ip nat inside source list 1 pool public interface ethernet 0 ip nat inside interface serial 0 x ip nat outside 5 12 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example DHCP Server at Remote Site Customer Premises Remote Site DHCP Server DHCP L Clients G FrameSaver xDSL Router 01 16925 In this DHCP Server at the remote site example The DHCP clients send IP address requests to the specified DHCP server The router is the DHCP server and
227. evention m Verifying the End to End Management Path on page 5 17 m Provisioning the Router Interface on page 5 17 m Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation on page 5 18 Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 5 1 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router FrameSaver DSL Router Overview The FrameSaver DSL Router supports locally attached hosts or subnets and various customer premises distribution networks that contain IP forwarding devices or routers The DSL router is shipped as an 802 1d bridge and it can be configured to simultaneously support IP routing and bridging of all non IP protocols The router maintains two routing tables to keep customer data and management data separate The router supports Internet Protocol IP specified in RFC 791 and Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP as specified in RFCs 792 and 950 with exceptions It acts as a router or gateway as defined in RFC 791 The router has two interfaces DSL Network Interface Frame relay packets converted to ATM are transported over the DSL line using this interface Ethernet This is a 10 100BaseT interface that automatically negotiates the rate If all attached Ethernet devices support 100BaseT the router defaults to 100BaseT Otherwise the router operates at 10BaseT The interface has a unique MAC address In router mode the router accepts on the Ethernet interface only those fram
228. evices 024 10 7 A Menu Hierarchy m MG RUS zai praa Sota Oh de thee Seal Ms ide ay het he rage dt ake A 1 FrameSaver DSL CSU DSUs Menu Structure A 2 FrameSaver DSL Routers Menu Structure A 4 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults E MIBSUpPOMt siadccc3 Seek ie eb ea Seas dae YA WEE el ee B 2 m Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps 00200e eee B 2 m System Group Mib 2 aeaaea 060 cee B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 0 00005 B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 B 3 m Interfaces Group mib 2 0 0 0 c eee B 4 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 4 NetScout Probe Indexes to the Interface Table iffable B 5 m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 0 0005 B 6 Trap warmStart 2 2 ae B 7 Trap authenticationFailure 0 0 00 c eee eee B 7 Trap linkUp and linkKDown 0 00002 eee eee ee B 8 Trap enterprise Specific 0000 B 11 Trap RMON Specific 0 0000 ce ee B 13 vi December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Contents m RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 0000 cee ee eee B 14 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults B 15 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 0 005 B 15 DLCI Alarm Defaults 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 cee B 17 m OID Cross References 0 00 cece eee eee eee B 19 C Router
229. f ATM DSL FR 101028001 network interface NAM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh B 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults NetScout Probe Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable 9700 A2 GB20 20 For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the ifName ifDescr and iflndex provided in Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical Network link on the network interface For the DTE side RMON IN OUT Network SDSL of FR DTE DSL FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side RMON IN OUT Network SDSL of FR SERVICE DSL FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh RMON Logical Layer RMON Virtual These values are Interfaces calculated based on the probe s internal circuit index circuit index 65 ALL VIRTUAL PVC interface number DLCI number ALL 65 99 999 999 December 2002 B 5 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you d
230. f FrameSaver Devices on page 9 2 Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System on page 9 2 Setting Up FrameSaver Support on page 9 3 Ordering Advanced SLM Feature Set Activations on page 9 4 To Find Your License Key Number The Activation Certificate Administering and Managing Advanced SLM Activations on page 9 6 Entering an Activation Certificate Checking Activation Certificate Status Scheduling Activations Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations Canceling Scheduled Activations Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report December 2002 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices The OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system provides the following features m Web and database services m Web access to health and status information m Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports m Web access to SLV reports for units with the Advanced SLM Feature Set activated m On demand polling of FrameSaver devices SNMP polling and reporting m Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests m Basic device configuration including RMON alarm and threshold configuration when the unit has the Advanced SLM Feature Set activated m Automatic device and PVC discovery for devices with the SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled m Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or pa
231. f IP addresses that the DHCP server should not distribute to clients The no ip dhcp excluded address command allows you to release previously excluded IP addresses for distribution to clients No IP addresses are excluded by default Up to 30 individual or ranges of IP addresses are supported Example ip dhcp excluded address 132 53 4 2 ip addr Specifies an IP address to exclude or the first IP address in a range of excluded IP addresses end ip addr Specifies the last IP address in a range of excluded IP addresses 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 C 15 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 16 Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands 2 of 3 lease days hours minutes infinite no lease days hours minutes infinite Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or clear the lease time for an IP address assigned to a DHCP client After the lease time has expired the address assignment is no longer valid The default lease time is one day Example lease 120 23 0 days Number of days the lease is valid The default is1 Valid range of days is 0 365 hours Number of hours the lease is valid The default is 0 Valid range for hours is 0 24 minutes Number of minutes the lease is valid The default is 0 Valid range for minutes is 0 59 infinite Specifies an infinite lease time The IP address assignment does not expire defa
232. fic Policing 1 5 4 23 Training control lead 7 7 Paradyne classes A Transfer Rate Kbps FTP Max 4 50 transfer rate of configurable FTP 1 4 transferring data 7 48 Translational Mode 4 7 4 27 9700 A2 GB20 20 Transmit Clock Invert 4 28 Source 4 29 Transparent Mode 4 7 4 27 Traps authentificationFailure B 7 DLCI 4 55 downloading MIBs and B 2 Enterprise Specific 4 54 B 11 Event Log 1 6 7 43 8 11 General 4 54 IP SLV Availability 4 56 latency 4 56 Link 4 55 Link Interfaces 4 55 linkUp and linkDown B 8 Number of Managers 4 53 RMON 4 56 RMON Specific B 13 SNMP 4 53 standards B 6 supported 8 2 warmStart B 7 Trend report 10 7 Trend reports 10 10 troubleshooting 8 1 ATM problems 8 13 device problems 8 12 frame relay PVC problems 8 14 management link 8 5 tables 8 11 TruePut technology 1 6 TS Access 4 5 Management Link 4 40 TS Management Link Access Level 4 40 6 7 limiting Telnet and FTP access 6 7 TTL 7 28 TXD control lead 7 7 U UDP port designations C 34 upgrading system software 7 46 uploading current router configuration 5 18 data 7 48 upstream pipelining 1 2 user history FTP poller 1 6 statistics gathering 1 5 1 6 synchronization 1 7 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index user interface 2 1 cannot be accessed 8 12 resetting restoring access 8 4 V V 35 connector E 7 EIA 530 A adapter E 9 specifying port type 4 7 straight through cable E 7 Value Out
233. ficate number m Your OpenLane License Key number m Model Prefix 9783 or 9788 m Feature Group Advanced SLV m Number of device activations ordered included on this certificate m Sales order number m Customer purchase order number m Customer or company name Contact sent to the attention of m Shipping address m Phone number E mail address m Date the certificate was generated December 2002 9 5 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Administering and Managing Advanced SLM Activations The OpenLane SLM system provides the following features that allow you to administer and manage your Activation Certificates and Advanced SLM activations From the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu you can Add or view the status of activations and see how many activations remain on each certificate Schedule when activations are to take place and verify that the activations occurred as scheduled View activations that are scheduled cancel activations or change the FrameSaver devices that are scheduled for activation as needed Generate and print a report that summarizes the activity on all Activation Certificates in your system which includes the number of activations ordered the number of activations remaining on the certificate and the date the certificate was ordered The report also includes information about each activated unit its system name IP address location model serial number and date of activation
234. figurable parameters to the current values in memory Passwords are write only and not output The text file can be used with a terminal emulation program Refer to Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation in Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router The general format of the show config command is global commands interface n interface n commands interface n sub interface n interface n sub interface n commands interface n sub interface n 1 interface n sub interface n 1 commands interface n 1 December 2002 C 25 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 26 Table C 13 Show Commands 2 of 4 show configuration saved unsaved Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode All config modes Displays outputs a sequence of commands in the form of ASCII strings that have the effect of setting all configurable parameters to the current values either saved in memory or entered during a current configuration session Passwords are write only and not output The text file can be used with a terminal emulation program Refer to Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation in Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router The general format of the show config command is the same as the previous command show configuration in Standard mode saved Displays the command sequence for saving parameters currently saved in memory unsaved Displays the command se
235. fourth column displays the Outside local IP address of an outside host as it appears to the inside network The fifth column displays the Outside global IP address assigned to a host on the outside network by its owner Whenever one of the IP addresses or the Protocol designation does not apply to a NAT table entry is displayed A protocol port is appended to IP addresses when NAPT is specified for that NAT entry show ip route ip address Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard This command shows the IP route table entry for the specified IP address If no IP address is specified the entire table is shown When the Next Hop IP Address is 0 0 0 0 the host is directly reachable on the interface The general format of the show ip route command will be as follows Dest IP Address Dest Subnet Mask Next Hop IP Addr Interface X X X X X X X X X X X X interface X X X X X X X X X X X X interface ip address Specific IP address for route information display December 2002 C 27 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 13 Show Commands 4 of 4 show ip traffic Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the IP statistics for the device show spanning tree Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the devices spanning tree topology C 28 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Ethernet Type Codes C
236. ftware version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels m In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded E Invalid indicates that no download has occurred or the download was not successful Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Ethernet MAC Address MAC Media Access Control address assigned to the Ethernet port during manufacturing December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Viewing LEDs and Control Leads The FrameSaver DSL unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces PARADYNE 9720 A Pe Ve amp FrameSaver DSL lad IDSL _System Network 02 17311 PARADYNE FrameSaver DSL SDSL 01 16946 PARADYNE 9783 ROUTER gt amp ESI Y s FrameSaver DSL F 00D SDSL System L Network 4 01 16945 PARADYNE 9788 CSU DSU FrameSavere DSL SHDSL 4 01 16990 PARADYNE 9788 ROUTER OA FrameSaver DSL SHDSL System 1 Net
237. ful or the unit is reset AutoRate The unit automatically detects the line rate from the network interface Fixed The unit uses the line rate specified by Network 1 DSL Line Rate December 2002 4 5 4 Configuration Options 4 6 Table 4 1 Easy Install Configuration Options 3 of 4 Network 1 DSL Line Rate 9783 Possible Settings If DSLAM Type is set to Paradyne or if DSLAM Type is set to Nokia and Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode is set to Fixed 144 192 208 256 272 384 400 512 528 768 784 1024 1152 1168 1536 1552 2320 If DSLAM Type is set to Alcatel NewBridge 208 400 784 1168 1552 2320 If DSLAM Type is set to Nokia and Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode is set to Hunt 192 384 768 1152 1536 If DSLAM Type is set to PairGain 144 192 208 256 272 384 400 512 528 768 784 1024 1152 1168 1536 1552 2320 Default Setting If DSLAM Type is set to Alcatel NewBridge and Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode is set to Hunt 208 If DSLAM Type is set to Nokia and Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode is set to Hunt 384 If DSLAM Type is set to PairGain and Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode set to Fixed 784 If DSLAM Type is set to Paradyne Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode is set to AutoRate and Network 1 DSL Line Rate does not appear Determines whether the rate on the DSL interface is set to a specific value or automatically detected using the Conexant AutoBaud algorithm
238. guring Node IP Information on page 4 38 for additional information For easy movement between screens from the Management PVCs screen select the PVCConn function key to go directly to the PVC connection screen For quick removal of unused DLCls select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the prompt Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC If the Management PVC selected is defined as a TS Access Management Link a Default IP Destination or a trap for Initial Route Destination a prompt appears to warn you Are You Sure To view the Management PVCs screen select Management PVCs from the Management and Communication menu Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Management PVCs A payload management circuit is identified by PM in the EDLCI field of the Management PVCs Options screen If a payload management management circuit is deleted the associated PVC remains standard even if was a multiplexed PVC automatically converted to standard when the management circuit was created If an existing PVC with an associated payload managed management circuit is deleted then the payload management circuit is also deleted 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 41 4 Configuration Options 4 42 Table 4 19 Management PVC Options 1 of 4 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank For the management PVC specify a u
239. h Up Time The number of days hours minutes and seconds since the last transition of this DLCI from Inactive to Active Far End Circuit Number of the DLCI at the other end of the connection None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end SLM Poll Type The role played by the far end FrameSaver in the collection of latency and availability statistics Initiator The far end FrameSaver initiates the SLV packet used for statistics collection Responder The far end FrameSaver returns the SLV packet sent by the Initiator 7 32 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 13 SLV Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Name The system name configured for the far end FrameSaver device obtained using its IP address Unknown appears if the far end device is not a FrameSaver or if no response has been received since the last reset COS Type Mismatches The number of SLV packets received that indicate a mismatch between the Class of Service definitions in the near end and far end devices Far End Type The model type of the far end FrameSaver device obtained using its IP address Unknown appears if the far end device is not a FrameSaver or if no response has been received since the last reset COS Name The names for different Classes of Service defined using the Class of Servic
240. h a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Network ATM Loopback A Network ATM Loopback is a nondisruptive test that can be run on a Virtual Channel Connection VCC for an ATM link on the network interface Select an enabled ATM link so available VCCs can be selected for testing on the link Network ATM Loopback Tests Screen Example main test network_atm 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 2 26 2001 08 03 Net1 ATM LOOPBACK TESTS VPI VCI 0 35 Loopback Type Segment Destination Segment ID FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF Reset Test Command Status Result ATM Ping Start Inactive RndTrip Time ms 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu The ATM Loopback causes the FrameSaver device to send either a segment or end to end loopback packet toward the network on the selected VCC then wait for a response ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column and the test is automatically stopped 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 21 8 Troubleshooting The follow
241. he data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 xX where xis the maximum line rate available on the port 0 maximum Specifies the network committed data rate Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well Bc Possible Settings 9720 0 144000 9783 0 2320000 9788 0 2312000 Default Setting 0 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s committed burst size Display Conditions This option appears only when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 maximum Specifies the DLCI s committed burst size December 2002 4 33 4 Configuration Options 4 34 Table 4 15 DLCI R
242. he lower frame lists all the devices in the selected category Entering an asterisk in the Name or Device IP field will display all FrameSaver devices in your system so you can pick and choose devices that will be activated In the lower frame click on the box in the Activate column to select or deselect a specific FrameSaver device for activation Proceed through the list until you have selected all the devices to be activated at this time Proceed through the other steps included on this screen then click on the prompt under Perform the scheduled verification activation to verify what you scheduled The Verify Schedule Feature Activations screen appears so you can verify the scheduling information Ifthe information is correct click on Apply Ilfnot or if you want to verify or change the devices that will be activated or the time the activations are to occur click on the prompt to return to the previous screen and reselect you options December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Checking the Status of Scheduled Activations You can check the status of scheduled activations or cancel activations at any time prior to the activations taking place by selecting View Abort scheduled task status from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu You can select all tasks or select tasks by model device name or IP address When you click on the prompt below the Select tasks table the table
243. hin its address range IP Address does not exist in ARP table An attempt was made to delete an ARP entry for an IP address but no ARP entry exists for the specified address Lease must be 0 365 days 0 24 hours 0 59 minutes An invalid lease time was entered Maximum number of access lists exceeded An attempt was made to add an access list but the maximum number of access lists have already been created Maximum number of access list assignments to interface exceeded An attempt was made to add an access list assignment but the maximum number of access lists have already been assigned to the interface Maximum number of filters exceeded on this access list An attempt was made to add an access list filter rule but the maximum number of filter rules have already been created Maximum number of NAT pools reached An attempt was made to add a NAT pool but the maximum number of pools have already been reached December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 7 4 CLI Messages 3 of 5 7 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates Maximum number of dynamic NAT translations rules reached An attempt was made to add a dynamic NAT translation but the maximum number of translations have already been reached Keywords list and pool were specified but not overload Maximum number of static NAT translations reached An attempt wa
244. how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 11 4 Configuration Options 4 12 Table 4 2 CSU DSU Frame Relay and LMI Options 3 of 3 LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter with the number of seconds between the initiation of status inquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status inquiry messages in increments of 5 seconds LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter with the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 seconds
245. ides a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Server feature as specified in RFC 2131 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and RFC 2132 DHCP Option and BOOTP Vendor Extensions DHCP is the protocol used for automatic IP address assignment DHCP setup considerations The range of IP addresses to be used by the DHCP server must be configured The maximum number of clients is 253 The DHCP server is not activated until one IP address and subnet mask are assigned to the Ethernet interface DHCP server and DHCP relay functions cannot be enabled at the same time When the DHCP IP address range is changed all binding entries automatically added routes and ARP table entries for the clients configured with the old address range are removed When the DHCP Server is enabled there can be only one IP address configured for the Ethernet interface The IP address for the next hop router provided to the hosts in the DHCP reply must be configured The minimum and maximum lease time settings can be configured The subnet mask can be configured along with the IP address range optional The DHCP server domain name can be configured optional The Domain Name Server DNS IP address can be configured optional December 2002 5 11 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router DHCP Server with NAT Configuration Example NAT with DHCP Server FrameSaver xDSL Router Private IP Address Ethernet Public Private Network Public IP N
246. ig t int e 0 ip address 10 1 3 1 255 255 255 0 no bridge group 1 int se 0 x ip address 172 20 95 2 255 255 255 0 no bridge group 1 exit ip route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 172 20 95 1 save exit 5 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Network Address Translation Network Address Translation NAT is used when a private network s internal IP addresses cannot be used outside the private network IP addresses may be restricted for privacy reasons or they may not be valid public IP addresses The router provides NAT as described in RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT NAT allows hosts in a private local network to transparently access the external public or global network by using a block of public addresses Static mapping enables access to selected local hosts from the outside using these external IP addresses Traditional NAT and Network Address Port Translation NAPT are supported When both NAT and NAPT are enabled one to one NAT mapping is performed by translating a range of assigned public IP addresses to a similar sized pool of private addresses followed by many to one NAPT bindings Up to 254 IP addresses can be allocated for NAT usage IP Options Processing The NAT and NAPT functions handle and process the IP datagrams with options set as described below No command is available to set IP options The router does not process and drops any IP datagrams with the followi
247. igible bit set m With BECN Set m BECNSs sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator m With FECN Set m FECNs sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator Advanced SLM Feature Set only Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI If the selected DLCI is IP Enabled the DLCI Performance Statistics screen has a second page listing statistics by Class of Service On the first DLCI Performance Statistics page for an IP Enabled DLCI PgUp and PgDn are shown as available commands in the function keys area of the screen Select PgUp or PgDn to display the second page Table 7 15 Additional Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI Statistic What It Indicates Class of Svc Name The names for different Classes of Service defined using the Class of Service Definitions screen See Configuring Class of Service Definitions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Class of Svc ID The ID numbers 1 7 of the Class of Service definitions The following IP statistics are shown for m The seven Classes of Service m Unknown COS IP packets whose Type of Service values do not match those defined for any Class of Service m Non IP Packets that were not IP Version 4 Total The total for all packets Tx Packets The number of packets transmitted Tx Oct
248. ignations Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands 3 of 3 network network num metmask netmask prefix length prefix length no network network num metmask netmask prefix length prefix length Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or remove a subnet and subnet mask to a DHCP server pool The configured subnet and subnet mask will specify the range of IP addresses that will be allocated to clients by the DHCP server Only one network or subnet may be specified for a server pool Example network 8 network num The IP address of the DHCP address pool netmask Specify a network mask that indicates which address bits belong to the network and subnet fields and which bits belong to the host field netmask The network mask for the pool of IP addresses prefix length or Specify the number of bits in a network mask address that are ones and define the network and subnet fields prefix length Number of ones bits in a network mask address Valid range is 1 32 NOTES If the mask or prefix length is not specified the class A B or C natural mask is used When the DHCP address range is changed all binding entries and dynamic routes for the clients configured with the old address range are removed December 2002 C 17 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations DHCP Relay Agent Commands Dynamic Host Configuration Pr
249. igured for the DTE or network Configure LMI options to match those of the DTE or network LMI link is inactive m For the CSU DSU verify that the LMI link is active the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen is incrementing m For the router verify that the Ethernet interface is active the Frames Transmitted and Frames Received counters on the Ethernet Performance Statistics screen are incrementing Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was selected it means the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized CIR settings for the units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it means that 5 packets out of 25 are missing or are out of sequence m Verify that the unit at the other end is configured to Send Pattern Correct unit configurations m Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same m Check the line s error rate for physical line quality Contact the service provider 8 14 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following FrameSaver DSL tests are available CSU DSU Test Menu Example main test 978x C SLV Device Name Node A 6 05 2001 08 02 TEST Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests Network ATM Loopback Tests Network Physical Tests 9788 only Data Port Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access th
250. ilure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port Network Generates trap messages on the network interface only Ports Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the user data port only All Generates trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM port that are applicable to the FrameSaver model DLCI Traps on Interfaces Interface Selection Field Possible Settings Network Ports All None Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only
251. in ID with different passwords for their access level To determine the level of access for a session refer to Access Levels Command Modes on page 6 11 After accessing the router s CLI You can access the Administrator access level by entering enable The router s defaults to no password required To require a password to access the Administrator access level enter enable password password Once saved the router responds with a prompt to enter a password for Administrator access This command is in effect until no enable password password is entered and saved You can end the current Administrator access level by entering exit This command results in ending the current Administrator access level session Exit may need to be entered several times to reach Operator level and or end the session You can end the Administrator access level by entering end This command results in ending the Administrator access level session and returning immediately to Operator level For further details refer to Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router and Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations 6 12 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 6 Security and Logins Creating a Login for the User Interface A login is required to access the user interface if security is enabled Security is enabled by configuration options for Communication Port Login Required m FTP Login Required m Telnet Login Requir
252. in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCIs can be included in an At a Glance Report For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set using the FrameSaver SLV report you can compare a DLCI s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level go
253. in the lower frame lists all the devices in the selected category scheduled for activation See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information Canceling Scheduled Activations To cancel scheduled activations select View Abort scheduled task status from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu select the desired tasks and click on the prompt to display the FrameSaver devices scheduled for activation Click on the box in the Abort column to select the FrameSaver devices that will not be activated then click on the prompt under Abort verifications activations to verify your selections and Apply Activations for the selected devices will be cancelled See the OpenLane SLM system s online Help for additional information Accessing and Printing the Certificate Summary Report The Certificate Summary Report provides information about the Activation Certificate and the activated devices SelectGenerate certificate summary report from the Firmware Feature Maintenance menu The report lists all Activation Certificates in your OpenLane SLM system and all the FrameSaver devices activated using each certificate Activation Certificate information includes the model feature the number of activations ordered the number of activations still covered by the certificate and the date the certificate was ordered m Device activation information includes the device s name IP address its location model serial number and
254. ing Disable Determines whether a Latency Threshold Alarm causes the generation of a Latency Threshold Exceeded Trap Enable Sends trap messages for Latency Threshold Alarm events Disable Does not send trap messages for Latency Threshold Alarm events IP SLV Availability Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Path Unavailability condition causes the generation of an IP SLV Availability Trap Enable Sends trap messages for Path Unavailability events Disable Does not send trap messages for Path Unavailability events 4 56 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring Ethernet Management Select Ethernet Management from the Management and Communication menu to configure management traffic options for the Ethernet interface see Table 4 24 Ethernet Management Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Ethernet Management Main Menu Easy Install Ethernet Management Options Screen NOTE If accessing Ethernet Management options from the Easy Install screen Save your changes Press the Esc key to return to the Easy Install screen Table 4 24 Ethernet Management Options 1 of 2 Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the Ethernet interface is being used for management traffic m f Status is changed from Disable to Ena
255. ing Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all MIB RFCs specified as either read only or read write Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands December 2002 4 47 4 Configuration Options Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions 4 48 Telnet and FTP options control interconnected IP network and security access applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active simultaneously on the user interface and one Telnet session can be active on the router interface see Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions When a TS Management Link has been configured and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level m FTP Login Required Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 3 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from an interconnected IP network Telnet client This option affects the TS Access Management Link Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow any Telnet session Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID
256. ing fields are explained below For Select or Enter VPI VCI From the VCCs configured for the ATM link Loopback Type m EndtoEnd For Operations Administration and Maintenance OAM functions The device defaults to this type of loopback m Segment For OAM functions a segment loopback will be performed on the selected VCC on the link Destination Segment ID m ATM Segment ID for the loopback destination The ID must be entered in 16 byte values 2 hexadecimal characters each separated by colons The first byte must be 00 01 02 03 or FF Ifthe first octet is FF octets 2 16 must also be FF Ifthe first octet is 00 octets 2 16 must also be 00 m Reset Resets the ATM Destination Segment ID for the VCC When selected all octets in this segment are set to FF as shown in the screen example NOTE Destination Segment ID and Reset do not appear if Loopback Type is EndtoEnd instead of Segment ATM Ping Start or Stop commands begin or end the test The following messages can appear on line 24 m If an ATM Location ID has not yet been configured Loopback Type is set to Segment an ATM Ping is started and an ATM Location ID must be configured message is displayed m If the device is already performing an ATM Ping an Invalid Was Already Active message is displayed m f any physical test is active on the interface when the ATM Ping was started
257. ing for this option is a frame relay interface that has at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or management link i e if the network interface has no DLCls defined Net1 FR1 does not appear as an option Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTES Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value For the Diagnostic Feature Set only one EDLCI per multiplexed DLCI may be used in the PVC connection 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option appears only when the Primary Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI and is not applicable when FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode is set to Translational see Table 4 12 Network ATM Options 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number December 2002 9700 A2
258. ing the unit If you change the default you must Save the change for it to take effect which will reset the unit When the default is changed the default settings for other configuration options change See Network 1 DSL Line Rate 9783 on page 4 6 DSL Line Rate Kbps on page 4 21 and Cell Payload Scrambling on page 4 27 for more information Paradyne The FrameSaver device is used with a Hotwire GranDSLAM Alcatel NewBridge The FrameSaver device is used with Alcatel s NewBridge DSLAM PairGain The FrameSaver device is used with PairGain s DSLAM Nokia The FrameSaver device is used with Nokia s DSLAM Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited The first octet of the address cannot be decimal 0 or 127 or greater than 223 Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address subnet mask that is needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it c
259. ion training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty m Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire MVL NextEDGE OpenLane and Performance Wizard are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation ReachDSL and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Contents About This Guide m Purpose and Intended Audience
260. ion key from the Main Menu There is no need to press Ctrl a first to access the function keys area of the screen Once the CLI is accessed you can use keyboard keys to navigate within the interface Using the routers CLI you can display and edit router configuration settings view router status and access router tests For details of all CLI commands and the conventions used when entering commands see Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations For a summary of abbreviated minimal command entries and their default settings see Appendix D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Keyboard Keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the routers CLI Most terminal emulation programs use these same keys Press To Enter Return Accept the current command line input Ctrl c m Clear the current command line entry m Abort a command line prompt without answering m Exit a command in progress Ctrl z Exit Configuration mode and returns to Standard mode A prompt appears to save any unsaved changes Backspace Erase the character to the left of the cursor Delete Erase the character the cursor is on Down Arrow Recall command line history buffer with the most recent command displaying first Buffer contains ten lines of history Up Arrow Scroll to the last valid command for editing Right Arrow Move the cursor one position to the right Left Arrow Mov
261. ions Cannot access the unit Login password is incorrect Reset the unit see Resetting or the menu driven COM port is improperly the Unit and Restoring user interface configured or the unit is Communication on page 8 3 otherwise configured so it prevents access m Contact your service representative Failure XXXXXXXX The unit has detected an m Record the 8 digit code from appears at the top of internal software failure the System and Test Status the System and Test screen Status screen for i Self Test Results m Reset the unit and try again m Contact your service representative and provide the 8 digit failure code No power or the LEDs The power cord is not Check that the power cord is are not lit securely plugged into the securely attached at both ends wall receptacle and the rear panel connector The wall receptacle has no Check the wall receptacle power power by plugging in other working equipment m Check the circuit breaker m Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test The unit has detected an m Reset the unit and try again fails Only Alarm LED _ internal hardware failure 2 i is on after power on Contact your service representative m Return the unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document Receiving data errors Frame Relay Discovery is Change the DLCI Type for ea
262. is set to Net Link see Table 4 25 Communication Port Options Ethernet Specifies that the default IP destination is the Ethernet interface Appears only when the Ethernet interface s Status is enabled When selected the Default Gateway Address must also be configured see Table 4 24 Ethernet Management Options PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Appears only when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVCname which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections as defined by the Name configuration option Table 4 19 Management PVC Options December 2002 4 39 4 Configuration Options 4 40 Table 4 18 Node IP Options 2 of 2 Management MTU Size Possible Settings 90 1500 Default Setting 1500 Release 2 1 Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU size in bytes to be used for management traffic This can be used to minimize jitter introduced to the data stream MTU is not enforced for traffic on the COM port or Ethernet port 90 1500 Specifies the MTU size TS Access Management Link Possible Settings None PVCname Default Setting Depends on model Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the network service provider s use If the
263. iscovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for FrameSaver devices in your network and discover their DLCls IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver devices must be entered for Network Health to find the FrameSaver devices on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of statistics that can be polled are m Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON2 and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes B gt Procedure To locate FrameSaver device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the FrameSaver devices to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver device The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing
264. ition What It Indicates What To Do LOSW Failure at Network 1 hhh mm ss Contiguous frames with LOSW defects have been detected for at least 2 seconds Contact your network provider Network Com Link Down minor alarm The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link Check the router connected to the COM port Path P_ Address Down DLCInnnn A path on the network interface is unavailable Determine why the path went down Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its basic verification tests when it was powered on or reset m Reset the unit m Contact your service representative SLV Latency Exceeded DLCI nnnn Port 1 The measured latency of SLV communication responses from the remote unit on this DLCI is excessive so the DLCI has been declared unsuitable for normal multiplexed PVC operation DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed Wait until the DLCI is declared operational again SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn Port 1 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote system have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI and link When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service pro
265. kDown trap B 9 Log Trap Event 1 6 logging on 2 2 logging out 2 3 Login 6 1 creating 6 13 ID 6 13 modifying and deleting 6 14 Required 4 48 4 60 6 3 6 5 6 6 FTP 4 50 LOL Loss of Link linkDown trap B 9 Loopback ATM 8 21 DTE 8 23 Port DTE Initiated 4 29 PVC 8 19 LOS Loss of Signal at Network 7 21 8 9 control lead 7 7 linkDown trap B 8 B 9 Loss of Signal Quality linkDown trap B 9 M MAC address 7 2 main menu 2 4 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index Management Create a Dedicated Link 4 5 Ethernet interface 4 57 Ethernet Options Screen 4 5 frame relay aware 1 4 General SNMP 4 46 in band router 1 2 maximum number of PVCs 1 5 MTU 4 40 Outbound Priority 4 26 PVCs 4 41 SNMP 4 46 Traffic IP Routing Table 7 27 troubleshooting link 8 5 TS Access Link 4 40 TS Link Access Level 4 40 limiting access 6 7 Management and Communication setting up 4 38 Managers Number of 4 51 Trap 4 53 Margin Alarm Threshold dB SNR 4 21 Max Transfer Rate Kbps FTP 4 50 Measurement Period LMI N4 4 31 menu configuration 3 2 driven user interface operation 2 1 main 2 4 path 2 5 selecting from 2 7 structure A 1 menu structure CSU DSU A 2 Router A 4 messages CLI 7 13 Device 7 8 Health and Status 7 20 Self Test Results 7 19 system 2 5 System and Test Status 7 19 Test Status 7 22 MIB downloading B 2 support B 2 Mode CLI command 6 11 FRF 8 Encapsulation 4 7 4 27 o
266. kets are routed to the destination IP address intf type Two interface types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Frame relay serial interface SDSL network interface intf num The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces 0 sub intf num The sub interface number Sub interfaces are only supported on the Network interface Serial 0 Sub interface number range is 0 4 294 967 295 December 2002 C 23 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 24 Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands 2 of 2 traceroute protocol desi ip source source ip length bytes timeout time hops hops interface intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard This command performs the TraceRoute test to the specified destination IP address The general format of the TraceRoute results is seen as follows Tracing route to x x x x over a max of nn hops with nnn byte packet 1 lt 100ms lt 100ms lt 100ms x x x x 2 lt 100ms lt 100ms lt 100ms x x x x 3 lt 200ms lt 200ms lt 200ms x x x x 4 lt 200ms lt 200ms lt 200ms x x x x The first column is the hop number which is the Time to Live TTL value set in the IP packet header Each of the three next columns contains the round trip time in 100ms intervals for each attempt to reach the destination with that TTL value If no response is received an asterisk is displayed in plac
267. l O OOO000000 O OTE cence 01 16690 01 Figure E 2 Model 9783 CSU DSU Rear Panel 01 16971 Figure E 3 Model 9788 CSU DSU Rear Panel E 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments 01 16859 01 Figure E 4 Model 9783 Router Rear Panel 01 16972 Figure E 5 Model 9788 Router Rear Panel The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface and some cables December 2002 E 3 E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DSL Network Interface and Cable The DSL network interface connector is an 8 position unkeyed RJ48C type modular jack Table E 1 DSL Network Interface Connector shows the pin assignments for the interface The network cable is orderable by Feature No 3100 F 1 500 Table E 1 DSL Network Interface Connector Pin Signal 1 3 Unused 4 Ring 5 Tip 6 8 Unused The following shows the cable s pin assignments and the purpose of each Orange Twisted Pair XX XXX 01 17044 E 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Model 9783 COM Port Connector Table E 2 Model 9783 COM Port Connector provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver Model 9783 CSU DSU s and router s 25 position EIA 232 E communication port connector E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments
268. le Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9788 Router with 8 PVCs and Advanced SLM 9788 A1 224 Feature Sets Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV Upgrade FrameSaver SLV 9720 Activation Certificate 9720 C1 220 FrameSaver SLV 9783 Activation Certificate 9783 C1 220 FrameSaver SLV 9788 Activation Certificate 9788 C1 220 FrameSaver SLV Activation Instructions 9000 A2 GK43 User Manual FrameSaver DSL Models 9720 9783 and 9788 User s Guide 9700 A2 GB20 Paper Manual For international models the country code is shown as xxx Contact your Paradyne sales office for the correct number 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 G 3 G Equipment List G 4 Description Model Number NMS Products OpenLane Enterprise 7805 D1 001 OpenLane Workgroup 7805 D 1 003 NetScout Manager Plus For UNIX or Windows NT 9180 NetScout Server For UNIX or Windows NT 9190 NetScout WebCast For UNIX or Windows NT 9155 Optional Housing Mounting Kit Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 894 For international models the country code is shown as xxx Contact your Paradyne sales office for the correct number December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Cables 9700 A2 GB20 20 This ta
269. le B 12 History OID Cross Reference 2 of 4 Above EIR Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDIciCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 7 1 D Tx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciTxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1 D Tx BECNs MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDliciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1 D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciRxFroutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D Rx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDIciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered M B pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered M B pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise GIR Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrinCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 41 1 D Network Frames Dropped MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise inci Tag devFrExtDiciDropOffFrinCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered M B pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise
270. link that provides connectivity to an IP network to support SNMP managers and Telnet sessions or it can be configured as a an asynchronous terminal interface NOTE If Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 4 18 Node IP Options and Port Use is changed to Terminal the Default IP Destination option is forced to None and Initial Route Destination see Table 4 23 SNMP Traps Options is set to AutoRoute Terminal The COM port is used for an asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM port is used as the network communications link to an IP network or IP device Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies COM port rate in kilobits per second 9 6 115 2 Sets the COM port speed in Kbps Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character 7 Sets the character length to seven bits Not available if Port Use is set to Net Link 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if the COM port is used as the network communication link Port Use set to Net Link Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number E
271. linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer continued Synchronous m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown One or more alarm Data Port conditions are active on the m ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 port Alarm conditions include Supported by the ifOperStatus RFC 1573 DTR off The DTR alarm media specific m devLastTrapString Stee only generis RS232 like MIB i a InkUp linkVown trap It the devHealthAndStatus mib DTE supports the DTR lead state RTS off The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state Not DTR or RTS but link is down Strings ifString alarmString down e g Sync Data Port SO1P1 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shut down Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp No alarms on the port String ifString up Ethernet Port m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown Communication is Supported by an m ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 es BRET De EERI entry in the MIB II j Interfaces Table m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 Loss of Signal LOS m devLastTrapString Loss of Frame LOF devHealthAndStatus mib Loss of Link LOL Loss of Signal Quality LPR Events Strings ifString down ifString administratively shut down Due to an intentional shutdown m linkUp Communication on the Ethernet port is r
272. lt zZ Code Points 1 NetwCtrl 110000 111000 2 Expd Fwd 101110 3 AFClass4 100010 100100 100110 4 AFClass3 011010 011100 011110 5 AFClass2 010010 010100 010110 6 AFClass1 001010 001100 001110 7 Default 000000 3 If these settings are satisfactory proceed to Step 10 4 Type a name of up to 8 characters into one of the Name fields next to IDs 1 6 5 To unassign all code points by inserting blank names select ClrAllCodePoints To assign all Code Points to a Class of Service name of Default select DefaultCodePoints 6 Select PgDn or PgUp The Code Point Assignment screen appears 7 For any Code Point you want to assign to the name type the name you selected in Step 4 into the Name field to the right of the Code Point 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 13 4 Configuration Options 4 14 8 Select Save then select PgDn or PgUp The Class of Service Definitions page reappears In the Code Points Assigned column next to your selected name there is now a Y for Yes 9 If latency and availability should be measured for the selected name change the N in the Measure Latency amp Availability column to Y 10 Select Save To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay Table 4 3 Class of Service Definitions Class of Svc Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting For IDs 2 7 blank
273. m conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully transmitted The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions m The PVC cannot be activated as a result of how the unit was configured The PVC may be disabled at one or both ends of The physical interface or The frame relay link m Some portion of the PVC connection is not fully configured December 2002 7 25 7 Operation and Maintenance Network Interface Status Network Interface Status can be viewed from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status Network Interface Status Network Interface Status Screen Example main status network Device Name Node A 9788 SLV 06 05 2001 06 04 NETWORK 1 INTERFACE STATUS Operating Rate Kbps Receiver Attenuation dB SNR Margin dB ESC for previous menu Refresh PgUp PgDn Table 7 10 Network Interface Status 2312 Threshold 5 3 39 6 3 MainMenu Field Display What It Indicates Operating 0 2320 The DSL line rate in Kbps Rate Kbps Disconnected The line is disconnected Receiver 0 255 in Loss of signal strength of the received Attenuation dB 1 dB increments DSL network signal assuming the far end was transmitting at 13 5 dB Disconnected The line is disconnected SNR Margin dB 9783 64 to 63 5 dB in 0 5 dB increments 9788 0 15 dB in 1 dB increments
274. m value is reached 2 7 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device This count continues to accumulate until the maximum count value has been reached then the count is reset and starts to accumulate dropped characters again m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 31 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 12 SLV Performance Statistics for Multiplexed DLCI 3 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection appears if comm
275. managed remotely via an inband data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing management access control can be regained after the timeout expires causing the test to terminate Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of user initiated tests Display Conditions This option appears only when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes December 2002 4 19 4 Configuration Options Configuring Network Interfaces Configuration of network interface is described in the following sections Configuring the Network Physical Interface m Configuring Frame Relay for the Network Interface m Configuring DLCI Records for the Network Interface 9720 m Configuring Circuit Records for the Network Interface 9783 9788 Configuring ATM for the Network Interface 9783 9788 Configuring the Network Physical Interface When configuring network interface physical characteristics select Physical from the Network menu See Table 4 7 Network Physical Interface Options 9720 Table 4 7 Network Physical Interface Options 9720 or Table 4 9 Network Physical Interface Options 9788 Main Menu gt Configuration gt Network Physical Table 4 7 Network Physical Interface Options
276. mation Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F 20 C to 70 C 4 F to 158 F 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Power Consumption and Dissipation 9720 5 6 watts 60 Hz 3 69 mA at 120 VAC 12 Result 19 1Btu per hour Power Consumption and Dissipation 9783 4 5 watts 60 Hz 3 135 mA at 120 VAC 12 Result 15 4 Btu per hour Power Consumption and Dissipation 9788 7 5 watts 60 Hz 3 84 mA at 120 VAC 12 Result 25 59 Btu per hour 7 6 watts 50 Hz 48 mA at 230 VAC Result 25 93 Btu per hour Physical Dimensions Height with feet Height without feet Width Depth 2 1 inches 5 3 cm 2 0 inches 5 1 cm 22 1 cm 6 2 inches 15 7 cm 8 7 inches Weight 9720 1 25 Ibs 0 57 kg Weight 9783 1 38 Ibs 0 62 kg Weight 9788 1 2 Ibs 0 55 kg December 2002 F 1 F Technical Specifications F 2 Table F 1 FrameSaver DSL Technical Specifications 2 of 2 Specification Criteria COM Port 9783 Standard Data rates 25 position DB25 connector EIA 232 E ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps COM Port 9720 9788 Standard Data rates 9 position DB9 connector EIA 232 E ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbp
277. mber 2002 1 7 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices 1 8 The illustration below shows a typical network configuration that includes a FrameSaver DSL Router Central Office Customer Premises Remote Site FrameSaver L xDSL Router oop Endpoint ATM DSL FR HQ Asynchronous Transfer Mode DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Digital Subscriber Line Frame Relay Headquarters Customer Premises Site FrameSaver LAN KX Endpoint FR ATM IWF Frame Relay NSP s Network FR Switches TDM Access Network IWF Interworking Function LAN Local Area Network NSP Network Service Provider TDM Time Division Multiplexer December 2002 01 16915 01 9700 A2 GB20 20 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices OpenLane SLM System OpenLane Features 9700 A2 GB20 20 Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM solution is an open standards based highly distributable system offering robust scalability and flexibility A Web browser enabled user interface provides accessibility anytime anywhere Paradyne s network management solution features support for diagnostics real time performance monitoring historical reporting and detailed health and status indicators for Paradyne s SNMP managed network access devic
278. me See Activating Software on page 7 47 to activate the newly downloaded software December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To verify download completion check the Identity screen Main Menu gt Status Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column If a software revision number appears the file transfer is complete If In Progress appears the file is still being transferred If Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful See Activating Software to activate the newly downloaded software Activating Software 9700 A2 GB20 20 Once a software upgrade is downloaded to the Alternate Release location it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets and then moves the downloaded software to the Current Firmware location With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Go to the Control menu and locate Select Software Release Main Menu gt Control Select Software Release The currently loaded software version and the new transferred software release are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure in Upgrading System Software on page 7 46 if this occurs Select Switch amp Reset Enter Yes to the Are you sure
279. me relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu Status gt Trap Event Log Trap Event Log Screen Example main status event_log 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 09 11 2002 23 32 TRAP EVENT LOG Total Trap Events 535 Time of Day Event 09 09 02 21 21 20 Change in Frames Discarded due to Inbound Resource Errors on Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 105 09 09 02 23 59 59 Change in Total LMI Errors on Network DSL frame relay link Net1 FR1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 59 09 09 02 23 59 59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 up 09 09 02 23 59 59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 down 09 10 02 00 41 02 Primary clock failed 09 10 02 00 59 59 Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down 09 10 02 01 00 02 Network DSL frame relay link Net1 FR1i LMI down 09 10 02 01 00 02 Network DSL down 09 10 02 01 03 23 Unit reset Refresh Up to 12 trap events can be displayed on a screen with the most current displayed first Page down PgDn to view less current trap events When no trap events have been logged No Events in Log appears in the Event column ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps in Appendix B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaul
280. meSaver DSL Router DHCP Relay Configuration Example 5 14 DHCP Relay Example Customer Premises Remote Site DHCP Clients FrameSaver xDSL DHCP Relay In this DHCP Relay example Customer Premises HQ Site Endpoint FrameSaver DHCP Server lt 4 L LAN Router a m The router is configured as a DHCP relay 01 16926 m UDP broadcasts received from DHCP clients are converted to routed DHCP requests and sent to the DHCP server m The DHCP server is specified ip dhcp server 155 1 3 254 ip route 155 1 3 254 serial 0 x December 2002 The command line syntax for this example where x is the number configured for the sub interface is 9700 A2 GB20 20 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Router Security IP Router Filtering Bridge Filtering 9700 A2 GB20 20 The router offers security via the following m Filtering can be enabled or disabled for inbound and or outbound traffic Ethertype ICMP Message Type Code IP Protocol Type TCP UDP or ICMP TCP UDP Ports IP Source Destination IP Address m Always enabled Land Bug Prevention Smurf Attack Prevention Router filtering does not apply when the router is in bridge only mode By default filtering is disabled on the router Filtering provides security advantages on LANs by restricting traffic on the network A filter consists of a set of rules a
281. n 0002 c eee ee eee 5 8 NAPT Configuration Example 00 0c eee eee 5 8 NAT and NAPT Configuration Example 55 5 10 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server 05085 5 11 DHCP Server with NAT Configuration Example 5 12 DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example 5 13 DHCP Relay Agent 0000 e eee eee 5 13 DHCP Relay Configuration Example 20005 5 14 Router Security sis ara arenie dodge ge bese ph ceca ade 5 15 IP Router Filtering 00 cece eee 5 15 Bridge Filtering ERED ESE E EE eee 5 15 P FREIND o EEE E TE T Ag ial end Deas 5 16 Land Bug Prevention cesses cers ade pnia EDEA eee 5 16 Smurf Attack Prevention naua uaaa 5 16 Verifying the End to End Management Path 5 17 Provisioning the Router Interface 2 0 eee eee 5 17 Configuring the Router Using Terminal Emulation 5 18 Uploading and Downloading the Router Configuration Via the CLI 5 18 6 Security and Logins 9700 A2 GB20 20 Limiting ACCESS ss wui 03 cia eis Bean apa e eat baste eee ad anaes 6 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 0000 6 3 Controlling External COM Port Device Access 6 4 Controlling Telnet and FTP Access 000 cece eee eae 6 4 Limiting Telnet Access 1 00 ee ee 6 5 Limiting FTP Access 00 0 iiaa a ee 6 6 Limiting Telnet or FT
282. n place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter Changing the Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This is called back to back mode and can be used for demonstrations or for a point to point configuration over a leased line To change the operating mode select Change Operating Mode from the Control menu Main Menu gt Control Change Operating Mode On the ensuing screen select Back to Back Operation or Standard Operation Standard Operation is the default mode 4 8 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuration Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which they are accessed when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 4 2 CSU DSU Frame Relay and LMI Options Table 4 3 Class of Service Definitions Table 4 4 Code Point Definitions Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options Table 4 6 General Options Table 4 7 Network Physical Interface Options 9720 Table 4 9 Network Physical Interface Options 9788 Table 4 10 Network Frame Relay Options Table 4 11 Circuit Records Options Table 4 12 Network ATM Options Table 4 13 CSU DSU Data Port Physical Interface Options Table 4 14 CSU DSU Frame Relay Options Table 4 1
283. n Chapter 4 Configuration Options NOTE These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or stop specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests B gt Procedure To start and stop a loopback or set pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select an interface and test e g Network or Data Port PVC Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test Start is highlighted 4 Select the test you want to start and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active 5 Press Enter to stop the test Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 6 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column Aborting All Tests Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces To abort individual tests that are active see Test Timeout Feature on page 8 16 and Starting and Stopping a Test B gt Procedure T
284. n configured you cannot assign an IP address to the interface or sub interface m When an interface address and subnet mask are deleted any routing entries with a Next Hop Router address that fall within the interface s address range are deleted automatically ip address P address of the interface or sub interface subnet mask Subnet mask to be used when the IP address is being compared during route table lookups The subnet mask cannot be 0 0 0 0 and only contiguous left justified subnet masks are allowed encapsulation encapsulation type encapsulation protocol Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Serial Specifies the type of encapsulation on an interface Example encapsulation frame relay ietf encapsulation type Specifies Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface The default is frame relay encapsulation protocol Specifies RFC 1490 encapsulation protocol on the serial interface The default is ietf December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 4 Interface Commands 3 of 3 no ip unnumbered nu11 0 Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config subif Enables or disables IP processing on a serial sub interface without assigning an explicit address The no ip unnumbered command removes any IP address assigned to the interface and disables IP processing on the interfac
285. nal Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLC Frame Relay Performance Statistics ATM Performance Statistics 9783 9788 VCC Performance Statistics 9783 9788 SHDSL Line Performance Statistics 9788 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 1 7 Operation and Maintenance Ethernet Performance Statistics Clearing Performance Statistics m Trap Event Log on page 7 43 m FTP File Transfers on page 7 44 Initiating an FTP Session Upgrading System Software Determining Whether a Download Is Completed Activating Software Transferring Collected Data Displaying Identity System Information 7 2 Use the Identity screen to view FrameSaver unit identification information This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main Menu gt Status Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node if entered System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM IDENTITY NAM Type Type of Network Access Module installed DSL FR ATM NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character Current Software Revision So
286. nce between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID for the frame relay link Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Threshold Default Sample Event Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Rising Falling Invalid D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Fames Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames Camins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Short D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Frames Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort mns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Long Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong aina OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards mma OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 1 D Delta The calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID for the frame relay link 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 B 15 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Tag devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs OI
287. nce grouped you can then run reports on all DLCIs in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z 0 through 9 dashes periods and underscores _ can be used No spaces can be included and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight the DLCls listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCIs move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCls have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information on grouping elements and customizing reports December 2002 10 5 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Running Reports from the Console
288. nd bug prevention 5 16 last reset 7 19 latency statistics 1 6 traps 4 56 Latency Exceeded SLV alarm 8 10 LCD Loss of Cell Delineation 7 21 control lead 7 7 status message 7 21 leased line back to back mode 4 8 LEDs 8 2 8 12 descriptions 7 5 limiting access 6 2 asynchronous terminal access 6 3 FTP access 6 6 SNMP access 6 8 through IP addresses 6 10 Telnet access 6 5 Line Rate Kbps DSL 4 6 4 21 4 22 Network DSL 4 6 Line Rate Mode 4 5 4 21 4 22 Link Create a Dedicated Network Management 4 5 Destination 4 36 Down Administratively 7 20 Ethernet 8 8 frame relay statistics 7 36 Primary 4 43 RIP 4 45 Source 4 35 Traps 4 55 Traps Interfaces 4 55 troubleshooting management 8 5 TS Access Management 4 40 TS Management Access Level 4 40 limiting access 6 7 linkUp and linkDown events 4 55 traps B 8 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 LMI and PVC availability 1 6 Behavior 9720 4 10 Behavior 9783 and 9788 4 11 Clearing Event N3 4 11 4 31 configuring frame relay and 4 10 Down 7 21 8 9 Error Event N2 4 11 4 30 frame relay statistics 7 37 Heartbeat T1 4 12 Inbound Heartbeat T2 4 12 4 31 N4 Measurement Period T3 4 12 4 31 packet capture 1 6 utility 8 5 Parameters 4 30 Protocol 1 2 4 30 Status Enquiry N1 4 12 uploading packet capture data 7 48 local external DTE loopback 4 29 Location ID ATM 4 8 locked out 6 3 6 13 8 4 LOF Loss of Frame lin
289. nfiguration Options 4 44 Table 4 19 Management PVC Options 3 of 4 Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the EDLCI number used by a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLCIs identify unique individual connections within multiplexed DLCls Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI if Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode is set to Translational see Table 4 12 Network ATM Options or if Payload Managed is enabled NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing to a standard DLCI suppresses the EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number Primary VPI VCI Number Possible Settings VPI 0 15 VCI 32 255 Default Setting If Payload Managed is disabled Blank If Payload Managed is enabled Lowest VPI VCI number of a non management circuit found in the network This option represents the VPI VCI of the primary link If Payload Managed is enabled this option specifies the VPI VCI for the payload managed PVC Display Conditions This option appears for an ATM link 0 15 Specifies the VPI 32 255 Specifies the VCI December 200
290. ng IP options m Loose source and record route type 131 m Strict source and record route type 133 m Security type 130 m Stream ID type 136 The router does process IP datagrams with the following IP options but does not provide its IP address or timestamp information in the response message m Record route type 7 m Timestamp type 68 Applications Supported by NAT 9700 A2 GB20 20 The router supports the following applications and protocols m FIP m HTTP m Ping m RealPlayer m Telnet m TFTP December 2002 5 5 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router NAT Configuration Example NAT Example Public IP Addresses Public Network FrameSaver xDSL Router 01 16948 In this NAT example m NAT is used for one to one mapping of addresses m The Ethernet interface is in the private address space and the DSL interface is in public address space With NAT enabled a single global PVC is used to access the public network m When using NAT the DSL interface must be numbered because the Ethernet interface is configured within the private address space m The next hop router default gateway for the clients is the Ethernet IP address of the router 10 1 3 1 m There are four private IP addresses configured on the Ethernet side of the router with NAT static mappings to four public IP addresses NAT Mapping Public IP Addresses Private IP Addresses 192 128
291. nication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used 4 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test IP Ping 5 Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start 6 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished ALive should appear as the Status If any other message is displayed additional testing is required 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 29 8 Troubleshooting Lamp Test 8 30 The FrameSaver device supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition Main Menu Test Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature on page 8 16 for additional information December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device 9700 A2 GB20 20 This chapter includes OpenLane Support o
292. nique name to display on screens e g Tampa ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Payload Managed Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the PVC is payload managed Enable The network PVC created will be monitored for the presence of IP frames containing the IP address specified in the Intf IP Address field When such a frame is identified it is extracted from the data stream and sent to the management stack Disable A normal management PVC is created using the specified DLCI or EDLCI Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the Interface IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC to provide connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Defaults to the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 4 18 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the units management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address Intf Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the Subnet Mask needed to access the unit via this management PVC to provide connectivity t
293. nit configuration and verify the setup Main Menu gt Easy Install Easy Install Screen 978X XXXXX 09 06 2002 04 02 main easy_install Device Name Node A EASY INSTALL 9783 DSLAM Type Paradyne Node IP Address 000 000 000 000 Node Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 TS Access VPI VCI 0 _35 Create a Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Management Options Screen 9720 Network 1 Operating Rate Kbps AutoRate 9783 9788 Network 1 DSL Line Rate Kbps AutoRate 9788 DSU Port 1 Port Type v 35 9783 9788 Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode Transparent Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save To access the device m For non managed networks Use the TS Access DLCI to ping the unit five times within five seconds m For managed networks Use the Dedicated Network Management Link that is created Table 4 1 Easy Install Configuration Options describes the entries on the Easy Install screen 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 3 4 Configuration Options 4 4 Table 4 1 Easy Install Configuration Options 1 of 4 DSLAM Type 9783 Possible Settings Paradyne Alcatel NewBridge PairGain Nokia Default Setting Paradyne Ensures interoperability with non Paradyne DSLAMs not just the Hotwire GranDSLAM This option is only available from the Easy Install screen NOTES The default is set before the unit is shipped based upon the CLEC customer order
294. nsferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data on page 7 48 A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver node m LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active m The SLV user history file is only available to units with the SLV feature set To eliminate operation interruptions FrameSaver SLV devices provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time 7 44 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Initiating an FTP Session Initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from option area Customer Configuration 1 or 2 into the Current Configuration area takes time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration p gt Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on the host For example on a UNIX host type tp followed by the FrameSaver unit
295. nterval T is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Be Bits is set to Other Configurable FTP Transfer Rate Allows control of the transmit rate used for downloading from the FrameSaver unit and uploading user history statistics to an NMS Network Management System via the COM port connection or a management PVC This allows the data to be transferred as a background task using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP over extended periods of time using low bandwidth December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices Multiplexed PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing management data with customer data transparently over a single PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit This feature also makes it possible to run nondisruptive PVC tests Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported Provides the following number of PVCs All models provide two dedicated management PVCs Model Product PVCs Diagnostic Feature Set 9720 A1 211 FrameSaver DSL 9720 Remote CSU DSU 8 9783 A1 211 FrameSaver DSL 9783 Remote CSU DSU 8 9788 A1 211 FrameSaver DSL 9788 Remote CSU DSU 64 9783 A1 213 FrameSaver DSL 9783 Central Site CSU DSU 64 9783 A1 214 FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router 8 9788 A1 214 FrameSaver DSL 9788 Router Advanced SLM Feature Set 9720 A1 221 FrameSaver DSL 9720 Remote CSU DSU with SLM 8 9783 A1 221 FrameS
296. o abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 17 8 Troubleshooting PVC Tests 8 18 PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface Data Port PVC tests do not apply to the DSL router m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m lf the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests The following example shows a FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU s PVC Test screen with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected If the DSL router or a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive displays after Test and the Connectivity test does not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test network_pvc 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 2 26 2001 08 03 Net1 FR1 PVC TEST
297. o an external IP network through the frame relay network Node Subnet Mask Uses the Subnet mask contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 4 18 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 19 Management PVC Options 2 of 4 Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set During network congestion this bit prioritizes which frames to discard first giving management traffic a lower priority than customer data Display Conditions This option does not appear if Primary Link is set to Net1 ATM Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port 1 Rtr SO Net1 ATM Clear Default Setting Initially blank
298. ode exit Leaves the current configuration level or terminates the session It may be necessary to enter the exit command several times when leaving configuration mode help Displays a summary of help options no pager Enables Outputs up to 23 lines reload Resets the router and reloads its configuration save Saves changes to the router s configuration December 2002 D 3 D Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Command Summary D 4 Table D 3 CLI Commands lists of all of the system level commands for the CLI For the default settings see CLI Command Default Settings on page D 6 Table D 3 CLI Commands 1 of 2 Command access list access list num permit deny source ip src wildcard any host source host ip protocol source ip source wildcard any host source host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code no access list access list num permit deny src ip src wildcara any host src host ip protocol src ip src wildcard any host src host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code arp ip address ma
299. ommand modes 6 11 Port 4 60 security 2 1 Session 4 49 TS Management Link 4 40 6 7 activating software 7 47 Activation Certificate 9 5 checking status 9 7 entering number 9 7 viewing status 9 7 checking status 9 9 managing 9 6 scheduling 9 8 SLV capability 9 4 adapter EIA 530 A to V 35 E 9 EIA 530 A to X 21 E 10 adding SLV units to network 10 3 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 5 3 Administrator changing access levels 6 12 CLI Access Level 6 11 configuration commands 5 2 Advanced SLM Feature Set 1 6 Alarm 8 8 Fail 7 5 conditions 8 2 LED is lit 8 12 OID cross reference B 23 RMON and configurable thresholds 1 6 RMON defaults B 14 Alcatel NewBridge DSLAM type 4 4 Alternate software revision 7 2 Annex Region setting 4 22 Annex A and D LMI Protocol 4 30 applications supported by NAT 5 5 ARP 5 3 CLI commands C 11 inverse 1 2 Proxy 4 58 proxy 5 3 arrow keys 2 6 2 9 assign community names and access levels 6 9 AT commands 4 63 At a Glance report 10 6 10 8 ATM configuring network interface 4 27 ILMI 4 27 LED 7 6 Location ID 4 8 Loopback on the network interface 8 21 Mode control lead 7 7 performance statistics 7 38 troubleshooting problems 8 13 VPI VCI and DLCI correlation 1 5 authentificationFailure trap B 7 Auto Configuration 1 4 AutoRate 4 5 4 21 4 22 AutoRoute 4 54 availability LMI and PVC 1 6 B B channel 972
300. on Output from the show configuration command can be captured to a text file using most terminal emulation programs Once the text file is captured the router can be placed in configuration mode The text file can then be fed back to configure the router December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Security and Logins This chapter includes the following 9700 A2 GB20 20 Limiting Access on page 6 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access on page 6 3 Controlling External COM Port Device Access on page 6 4 Controlling Telnet and FTP Access on page 6 4 Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link Controlling SNMP Access on page 6 8 Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Controlling Router CLI Access on page 6 11 Access Levels Command Modes Changing Access Levels Creating a Login for the User Interface on page 6 13 Modifying a Login on page 6 14 Deleting a Login on page 6 14 December 2002 6 1 6 Security and Logins Limiting Access 6 2 The FrameSaver DSL device provides access security on the following interfaces m Asynchronous async terminal m Telnet m FIP SNMP m Routers Command Line Interface CLI The number of user interface active sessions available are m Two simultaneous Telnet sessions m One Telnet session and one active COM port termin
301. on_VPI VCI Specifies a frame relay DLCI VC on a specific ATM VPI VCI for TS access DLCI range is 16 1007 ATM data is presumed to be encapsulated according to RFC 1490 see Network 1 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 9783 and 9788 on page 4 7 Create a Dedicated Network Management Link Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank Enter a DLCI number and VPI VCI for a dedicated network management PVC NOTE With the cursor on the Create a Dedicated Network Management Link field press Enter The Which DLCI would you like to Create a Dedicated Frame Relay Management PVC on prompt appears If the DLCI entered is over an ATM link or Port 1 for the CSU DSU Prompts for VPI and VCI also appear 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number be used Ethernet Management Options Screen Provides a link to the Ethernet Management Options Screen Press Enter and the screen appears see Configuring Ethernet Management on page 4 57 After configuring Ethernet options press the Esc key to return to the Easy Install screen Network 1 DSL Line Rate Mode Possible Settings Hunt 9783 AutoRate Fixed Default Setting AutoRate Specifies the mode to be used for rate selection Hunt 9783 only The unit attempts to train at rate specified by Network 1 DSL Line Rate If that fails the unit attempts to train at the next higher rate and if unsuccessful cycles through all the rates until training is success
302. onal numeric index used by tables like frame burst size 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 B 23 B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 13 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limits 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkSegErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Tx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs 1 3
303. onfiguration Options NOTES When Basic NAT is enabled the DSL interface must have Proxy ARP enabled if the interface address is part of the Basic NAT global IP network address Proxy ARP and NAPT cannot be enabled at the same time December 2002 5 3 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Interface Configuration The following examples require that IP addresses have been assigned to the Ethernet and Serial interfaces and that a passthrough PVC connection exists to Rtr SO Optionally you might also disable bridging In the following example the Serial O sub interface is shown as x The valid range is 0O 4 294 967 295 B gt Procedure To set up the router s interfaces 1 Ifa Net1 FR1 DLCI does not exist Create one using the Network Circuit Records screen then select CreatePVC Whenthe Create Pvc using DLCI Number prompt appears select a DLCI and press Enter Whenthe Create Pass Thru PVC Connection to prompt appears enter Rtr SO Save the configuration 2 From the Main Menu screen press Ctrl a then Shift r to access the router s Command Line Interface Set the IP addresses of the interfaces The following example commands Set the Ethernet interface address to 10 1 3 1 Set the Serial 0 x interface to 172 20 95 2 Disable bridging for both interfaces Specify that messages for all IP addresses should be routed to the upstream router at 172 20 95 1 en conf
304. ont panel LED 7 6 IDSL network options 4 20 Line Rate Kbps 4 6 4 21 4 22 Line Training 7 20 network interface 5 2 options 4 20 status 7 26 router overview 5 2 terminal emulation 5 18 statistics 7 40 DSLAM type Alcatel NewBridge 4 4 Nokia 4 4 PairGain 4 4 Paradyne 4 4 DSLAM type selecting 4 4 DSU CSU menu structure A 2 DTE Initiated Loopbacks 4 29 Loopback 8 23 port connector pin assignments E 7 E 8 DTLB 8 23 DTR control lead 7 7 down 8 8 down from Port 1 Device 7 20 Ignore Control Leads 4 60 Monitor 4 29 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 5 11 E Easy Install menu 2 4 using this feature 4 3 EDLCI 4 44 Destination 4 36 Source 4 35 EIA 232 E COM Port connector E 5 EIA 530 A connector E 8 specifying port type 4 7 V 35 adapter E 9 X 21 adapter E 10 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index EIR enforcement 4 23 statistics 7 31 elements DLCls 10 3 Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI 4 35 4 36 4 44 emulation programs configuring the router 5 18 enabling ILMI 4 27 Encapsulation 4 45 Encapsulation Mode 4 7 4 27 ending a session 2 3 Enterprise Specific Traps 4 54 B 11 equipment list G 1 Error Event Cell Delineation Threshold 4 27 LMI 4 11 4 30 errors frame relay statistics 7 36 Esc key 2 6 Ethernet control lead 7 7 interface 1 2 5 2 Link Down 8 8 Management 4 57 Options Screen 4 5 Mgmt Down 7 20 performance statistics 7 4
305. op of the System and Test Status screen Table 7 5 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure XXXXXXXX An internal failure occurred 1 Record the failure code XXXXXXXX represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure eee ome code used by service 3 If problem still exists contact personnel your service representative Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error information will be lost Passed No problems were found No action needed during power on Last Reset The Last Reset field provides the last date and time that the FrameSaver unit was reset This field is located after the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 19 7 Operation and Maintenance Health and Status Messages Table 7 6 Health and Status Messages provides Health and Status messages that apply to the FrameSaver unit Table 7 6 Health and Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates Back to Back Mode Active The unit has been configured for back to back operation Main Menu Control Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line
306. operational Inactive m The path is not operational Discovery Source The source of the path definition m Static m The path was entered using the IP m 000 000 000 001 255 255 255 255 Path List Static screen m This is the IP address of the FrameSaver unit that provided the path December 2002 7 23 7 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status PVC Connection Status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status PVC Connection Status PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 06 05 2001 06 03 Page 1 of 2 PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Link DLCI EDLCI Status Port 1 201 Net1 FR1 300 PM Active Port 1 202 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 100 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Port 1 204 Net1 FR1 1001 Active Rrt so 204 Net1 FR1 206 Active Mgmt PVC Port 1 16 Active Mgmt PVC TS_Mgmt Net1 ATM 0 35 Active Mgmt PVC Largo Net1 ATM 0 33 Refresh Only PVC connections with an active Source DLCI configuration are shown If the No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet Table 7 9 PVC Connection Status Screen 1 of 2 Field Display What It Indicates Link Identifies the cross connection of source and primary destination DLCls configured for the unit m Neti FR1 m The frame relay link 1 is the source destination is on Network 1 m Net
307. or the frame relay link B 16 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 DLCI Alarm Defaults B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are placed in the Paradyne alarm area and are listed alphabetically in Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Threshold Default Sample Event Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Rising Falling Average A MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs None Must be 0 Latency Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 15 mins configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1LD Congested D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 60 secs Rising 5 5 peronds Tag devFrExtDiciStsCongestedSecs eon OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Current A MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 60 secs None Must be 0 Latene Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest Chin eonlgued OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D DLCl Inactive D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Seconds Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs tamine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 60 secs Rising 1 1 D 1 mi i by Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr gimat OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames D MIB Frame Relay DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs None Must be 0 Basics Tag frCircuitReceive
308. ork Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens 2 Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens 3 In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the device s CIR in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 Kbps or 16 m for 16 Mbps 4 Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the devices are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports 10 4 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device Grouping Elements for Reports 9700 A2 GB20 20 Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCIs should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all FrameSaver and SLV elements O
309. ose DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points lt is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCls contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCls having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Element Summaries a DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between a DLCI s average and peak Health Index rating December 2002 10 7 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device Elements Summary Report Compares
310. ost dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port I type code range end type code no access list access list num permit deny source ip source wildcard any host source host ip protocol source ip source wildcard any host source host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any host dest host ip icmp msg type icmp msg code dest operator dest port dest end port type code range end type code Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows a user to create or delete a rule for an access list Access lists default to an implicit deny statement for everything Access lists are terminated by an implicit deny access list num The access list number Valid ranges for access lists are 1 99 Standard IP access lists 100 199 Extended IP access lists 200 299 Protocol type code access lists permit Specifies to permit access and forward packets matching the criteria deny Specifies to deny access and discard packets matching the criteria For Standard IP Access Lists Example access list 1 permit 10 1 1 1 source ip The source IP Address to match source wildcard Specifies a 32 bit wildcard mask indicating the bit positions in the source IP address to ignore during matches This argument must be supplied when a source ip address is specified any
311. ot be deleted only sub interfaces can be deleted Unable to Transmit ping packet A Ping cannot be performed because No ports are enabled for IP m The specified interface does not exist m The link is down Unable to Transmit traceroute packets A traceroute cannot be performed December 2002 7 17 7 Operation and Maintenance Status Information Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for a central site CSU DSU Status Menu main status 9783 C SLV Device Name Node A 2 26 2001 06 02 STATUS System and Test Status Pvc Connection Status Network Interface Status IP Routing Table Management Traffic Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu 7 18 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages To access System and Test status information Main Menu Status gt System and Test Status The following information is included on this screen m Self Test Results Messages m Last Reset m Health and Status Messages m Test Status Messages NOTE Status messages in the following sections are in alphabetical order Self Test Results Messages Self test result messages shown in Table 7 5 Self Test Results Messages appear in the Self Test Results field at the t
312. otocol DHCP relay agent commands Table C 10 DHCP Relay Agent Commands ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients no ip dhcp relay max clients max dhcp clients Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to limit the number of DHCP clients supported The no dhcp relay max agents command resets the maximum number of DHCP clients supported to the default of 1 Example ip dhcp relay max clients 1 max dhcp clients Number of DHCP clients supported 1 256 no ip dhcp server p address Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows you to specify or remove the address of the DHCP server where DHCP requests received on the Ethernet interface are forwarded When no server address is assigned the DHCP Relay agent is effectively disabled NOTE The DHCP Relay agent cannot be enabled if either the DHCP server or NAT are enabled ip address IP address of the DHCP server C 18 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Filter access list Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 Filter commands are used to create or delete Access Lists Table C 11 Filter Commands 1 of 4 access list access list num permit deny source ip source wildcard any host source host ip protocol source ip source wildcard any host source host ip src operator src port src end port dest ip dest wildcard any h
313. pd Printer service 517 talk Talk 540 uucp UNIX to UNIX Copy Program 543 klogin Kerberos login 544 kshell Kerberos shell December 2002 C 33 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations UDP Port Designations C 34 Use the User Datagram Protocol UDP port designations in Table C 17 UDP Port Designations when specifying a specific UCP port to be filtered Table C 17 UDP Port Designations UDP Port UDP Port Name Description 7 echo Echo 9 discard Discard 37 time Time 42 nameserver IEN116 name service obsolete 49 tacacs TAC Access Control System 53 domain Domain Name Service DNS 67 bootpc Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP client 68 bootps Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP server 69 tftp Trivial File Transfer Protocol 111 sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call 123 ntp Network Time Protocol 137 netbios ns NetBios name service 138 netbios dgm NetBios datagram service 161 snmp Simple Network Management Protocol 162 snmptrap SNMP Traps 177 xdmcp X Display Manager Control Protocol 195 dnsix DNSIX security protocol auditing 434 mobile ip Mobile IP registration 512 biff Biff mail notification comsat 513 who Who service rwho 514 syslog System Logger 517 talk Talk 520 rip Routing Information Protocol December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Router Command Line Summaries and Shortcuts CLI Summaries 9700 A2 GB20 20 For summaries of Comm
314. perating 4 8 Modem External Commands 4 63 configuring E 11 December 2002 IN 7 Index modifying a login 6 14 Monitor DTR 4 29 Pattern 8 20 RTS Control 4 29 monitoring FrameSaver unit 7 18 LEDs and control leads 7 3 MTU 4 40 Multiplexed DLCI 4 35 4 36 4 43 4 44 DLCI Type 4 25 4 32 PVCs 1 5 8 20 N N1 LMI Status Enquiry 4 12 N2 LMI Error Event 4 11 4 30 N3 LMI Clearing Event 4 11 4 31 Name 4 42 Access 4 46 4 47 Community 4 46 4 47 NAPT 5 8 configuration example 5 8 and NAT 5 10 NAT 5 5 and IP filtering 5 16 applications supported 5 5 CLI commands C 12 configuration example 5 6 and NAPT 5 10 with DHCP server 5 12 navigating the screens 2 6 navigation keys 2 6 2 9 Net Link Port Use 4 59 IN 8 Network Address Port Translation NAPT 5 8 Address Translation NAT 5 4 ATM Loopback 8 21 Com Link Down 7 21 8 10 configuration examples 1 7 configuring Frame Relay 4 23 configuring the interface 4 20 DSL interface 5 2 pin assignments E 4 DSL Line Rate Kbps 4 6 FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode 4 7 4 27 Health Concord reports 10 1 interface configuration options 4 20 configuring ATM 4 27 configuring Circuit Records 4 24 control leads 7 7 pin assignments E 4 status screen 7 26 latency 1 6 Management Create a Dedicated Link 4 5 physical interface configuration 4 20 physical tests 8 23 reference time 1 7 user history synchronization 1 7 NLPID enc
315. peration and Maintenance Table 7 3 Device Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Resetting Device Please Wait Yes was entered for Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu No action is needed Save Cancelled Changes were made on the Easy Install screen but the Esc key was pressed or No was entered in response to the Save Changes prompt No action is needed Test Active No higher priority health and status messages exist and a test is running m Contact service provider if test initiated by the network m Wait until the test ends and message Clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path Main Test m Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from User Interface Already in Use Two Telnet sessions are active when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are displayed m Wait and try again Contact one of the IP address users and request that they log off User Interface Idle Previously active session is ended and access via the COM port is now available Log on to the FrameSaver unit Session has been ended due to timeout No action is needed Value Out of Range CIR entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid CIR 0O 15360
316. ponse Timeout sec Status Transmit Receive Lost Loss Ratio Pings 000000 000000 000000 0000 Current Minimum Maximum Average Roundtrip Delay ms 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit 8 24 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Table 8 5 Ping Options 1 of 2 Target IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 001 126 000 000 000 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address to which a ping will be sent 000 000 000 001 126 000 000 000 128 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Specifies the IP address Destination Interface Possible Settings Use_Internal_Route Port n Net1 FR1 Default Setting Use_Internal_Route Specifies the routing method or destination interface for the ping Use_Internal_Route When choosing which interface to send the ping the unit first consults its routing table If the address or subnet does not appear in the routing table the ping will be sent to the Default IP Destination if defined See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options Port n Net1 FR1 The ping is sent out the specified destination regardless of the internal route configuration DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Lowest assigned DLCI on the selected interface Specifies the DLCI to be used for the ping
317. port number to be filtered This option only applies to a protocol of tcp or udp Many of the valid TCP and UDP ports are described in Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid TCP or UDP port number range is 0 65535 dest end port Specifies last TCP or UDP port number in a range of port numbers to be filtered This option only applies to a protocol of tcp or udp with dest operator set to range Many of the valid TCP and UDP ports are described in Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid TCP or UDP port number range is 0O 65535 For Protocol Type Access Lists Example access list 200 permit 0x200 range 0x210 type code Specifies the 16 bit hexadecimal number written with a leading 0x that specifies either an Ethernet type code or the first Ethernet type code in a range of Ethernet type codes to filter If a user attempts to a type code that is not a 16 bit hexadecimal number written with a leading 0x it will be treated as a syntax error Many of the Ethernet Type codes distributed by the Xerox Corporation are listed in Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex This option only applies to protocol type code access lists range Specifies a range of ether type codes This option only applies to protocol type code access lists end type code The last ethernet type code included in the filter range A 16 bit hexadecimal number written with a l
318. ppears If the Device Name field has been configured via the Control menu Control Menu gt System Information the login prompt displays the device name For example a device name of Largo is shown as Largo gt See Creating a Login for the User Interface on page 6 13 for security information for each Login ID Access Levels Command Modes There is one login ID and several levels of privileges for the router s CLI Your user account can be configured with one user name and different passwords for Operator The Operator has read only access to display device information with no modification permission and limited access to diagnostic functions With a device name of Largo the prompt appears as Largo gt Administrator The Administrator has several levels of access to the DSL router s CLI The sign in the following prompts indicates Administrator access level Display Prompt with Device Name of Largo Administrator Access Levels Largo gt Standard same as Operator Largo config Configuration Largo config if Configuration Interface Largo config subif Configuration Sub Interface Largo config dhcp Configuration DHCP Pool Refer to Appendix C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations for access level details for each command line entry 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 6 11 6 Security and Logins Changing Access Levels The Operator and Administrator have the same Log
319. pplied to a specific interface to indicate whether a packet received or sent on that interface is forwarded or discarded Filters are configured in general router configuration mode then applied to the Ethernet or frame relay network interface Filters are applied to traffic in either the transmit or receive direction on that interface There is one filter access list per interface per direction with a maximum of 33 rules per list For IP filters all rules with a source host IP address are applied first all rules with a destination host IP address are applied next The remaining filters are applied in the order in which they were configured Bridge filtering does not apply when the router is in router only mode When bridging is enabled separate ethertype filters are applied to the Ethernet and frame relay interfaces They are applied to traffic in either the transmit or receive direction on that interface with one filter access list per interface per direction There is a maximum of 16 rules per list Each rule in the access list allows the user to filter a single ethertype or range of ethertypes MAC frames can be filtered based on the m SNAP Ethernet field in the 802 2 and 802 3 header m Protocol type field in the DIX Ethernet header For ethertype filters the rules are applied in the order in which they were configured December 2002 5 15 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router IP Filtering For more information about
320. protocol discovered from the attached DTE device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The frame relay link discovers the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls The protocol will not be updated after the initial discovery Auto_On_LMI_Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device when an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the Port and network interfaces The frame relay link discovers the LMI protocol from LMI status polls by the attached DTE device Standard Supports Standard LMI and the StrataCom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options refer to Table 4 2 CSU DSU Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occu
321. quence for saving parameters entered during the current configuration session show frame relay map Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the status of all frame relay DLCls seen on the router s frame relay interface The general format of the show frame relay map command is interface interface status dici dici number dici status Where the interface or sub interface shall be displayed in the standard format shown in the Interface Commands The interface status is up or down The dlci number is in the range 16 1007 Frame relay map statements are only displayed for DLCIs configured on both the router and on the devices user interface The dici status is active or inactive show interface intf type intf num sub intf num Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Shows the status of the named interface sub interface or all interfaces and sub interfaces on the device intf type The interface type The following two types are supported Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface Serial Serial interface intf num The interface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces 0 sub intf num The sub interface numbers are only supported on the Network interface Serial 0 Sub interface numbers supported 0 4 294 967 295 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 13 Show Commands
322. r Call Paradyne for compatible DSLAMs see Warranty Sales Service and Training Information in the front of this document for the phone number OpenLane SLM Service Level Management System This solution controls network costs by providing increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics to identify and troubleshoot problems more quickly FrameSaver DSL devices operate with other FrameSaver devices and are also compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software December 2002 1 1 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices FrameSaver DSL Features Based upon the model ordered or whether the device has been upgraded to Service Level Verifier SLV capability FrameSaver DSL devices have the Diagnostic Feature Set or Advanced SLM Feature Set each providing different levels of intelligence for monitoring managing and reporting performance of the device For features specific to the DSL CSU DSU or router see CSU DSU Specific Features and Router Specific Features CSU DSU Specific Features The following features only apply to the DSL CSU DSU Two Interfaces Provides two interfaces for traffic Synchronous DTE port for user data Ethernet Interface for management data m Upstream Pipelining Provides pipelining capability into the Wide Area Network WAN for reduced latency where groups of bytes are transmitted as soon as they are received rather than waiting for the entire frame to be collected before s
323. r on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of an UNI Display Conditions This option appears only when LMI Parameters is set to Custom 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors 4 30 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 14 CSU DSU Frame Relay Options 2 of 2 LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to UNI user and network sides Display Conditions This option appears only when LMI Parameters is set to Custom 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only Display Conditions This option appears only when LMI Parameters is set to Custom 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 seconds LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 pa
324. r one element only Ky Braces within brackets indicate a required choice within an optional element Italics Entry is a variable which must be supplied by the operator Bold Entry or the minimum characters that can be entered must be typed as shown X X X X 32 bit IP address and mask information where x is an 8 bit weighted decimal notation XXIXXIXX XX XX XX MAC address information where xis a hexadecimal notation With the exception to the Login ID and Password the CLI is not case sensitive Refer to Navigating the Router s CLI in Chapter 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation for additional information 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 C 1 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations This appendix contains the following tables for commands m Table C 1 Pager Command m Table C 2 Access Control Commands m Table C 3 Configuration Commands m Table C 4 Interface Commands m Table C 5 IP Routing Commands m Table C 6 Bridge Commands m Table C 7 ARP Commands m Table C 8 NAT Commands m Table C 9 DHCP Server Commands m Table C 10 DHCP Relay Agent Commands m Table C 11 Filter Commands m Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands m Table C 13 Show Commands In addition the following tables are used in the commands above m Table C 12 Diagnostic Commands m Protocol and Port Designations Table C 15 ICMP Designations Table C 16 TCP Port Designations Ta
325. r panels tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Appendix F Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Appendix G Equipment List Equipment List Index Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals gt Technical Glossary December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Product Related Documents 9700 A2 GB20 20 About This Guide Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation 9000 A2 GB20 Configuring Frame Relay Service Over DSL 9000 A2 GK43 FrameSaver SLV Activation Instructions 9700 A2 GL10 FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU Models 9783 and 9788 Quick Reference 9700 A2 GL11 FrameSaver DSL Router Models 9783 and 9788 Quick Reference 9720 A2 GN10 FrameSaver DSL 9720 CSU DSU Installation Instructions 9783 A2 GN10 FrameSaver DSL 9783 CSU DSU Installation Instructions 9783 A2 GN11 FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router Installation Instructions 9788 A2 GN10 FrameSaver DSL 9788 CSU DSU Installation Instructions 9788 A2 GN11 FrameSaver DSL 9788 Router Installation Instructions Paradyne Hotwire Documentation 8000 A2 GB26 Hotwire MVL ReachDSL RADSL IDSL and SDSL Cards Models 8310 8312 8314 8510 8373 83
326. r reset m RIP The route was discovered through Routing Information Protocol The route remains until its TTL Time to Live expires a better route is provided via RIP or there is a power reset m Tmp The route was added as a temporary route in order to respond to an IP packet that was received The route remains until the TTL expires or there is a power reset m Source of the route is not maintained within the device Interface Specifies the interface to be used to reach the destination COM Communications port m Ethernet Ethernet port m PVCMgmtname Name and number of the management PVC m Internal Interface to be used for software loopbacks or internal device functions in order to reach the destination TTL The Time to Live that was set for the route 1 999 seconds December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when researching the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Physical and link layer statistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the interface The following menu shows performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance 978x SLV Device Name Node A 6 05 2001 06 06 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level V
327. rameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access a MIB object ASCII text entry Add or change Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 field Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of MIB access allowed With this access type SNMP managers can externally access MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all MIB RFCs objects specified as either read only or read write Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 20 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access a MIB object ASCII text entry Add or change Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 field Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of MIB object access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects us
328. rames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SLV Sample Interval secs in seconds SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between SLV devices Tributary Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments 4 16 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 3 SLV Type Available Settings Standard COS 1 COS 7 Default Setting If SLV Feature is enabled Standard If SLV Feature is disabled COS 1 Determines the type of SLV measurements to which these other SLV options apply m SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold m
329. rameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side Display Conditions This option appears only when LMI Protocol is set to Standard and LMI Parameters is set to Custom 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 seconds December 2002 4 31 4 Configuration Options Configuring DLCI Records 4 32 Depending on the model DLCI records can be created and modified and PVCs created based on existing DLCls using the Network Data Ports or Virtual Router Ports DLCI Records screen Main Menu gt Configuration Network DLCI Records Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records Main Menu gt Configuration Virtual Router Ports DLCI Records Table 4 15 DLCI Records 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLC numbers range from 0 1023 with numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 Ifthe DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES Ifa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI
330. ries by default ip address The IP address of the ARP entry to be created or deleted mac address MAC address arp type Specifies the ARP type Valid ARP type is arpa the standard Ethernet style ARP RFC 826 arp timeout time no arp timeout time Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Ethernet Allows you to specify the amount of time that ARP information is retained in the ARP cache The no arp timeout command restores the default ARP timeout value Example arp timeout 28000 NOTES The amount of time the device waits before reattempting to acquire ARP information for incomplete entries is 5 seconds and is not configurable The internal ARP timeout timer has one minute precision so the ARP timeout is implemented by rounding up to the nearest minute time The ARP timeout value in seconds Valid range is 1 4294967 seconds The default is 14400 clear arp cache Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode Standard Deletes all dynamic ARP table entries from the ARP cache December 2002 C 11 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations NAT Commands C 12 Network Address Translation NAT commands are used to enable or disable NAT on an interface or sub interface and specify whether IP addresses on the interface are public or private Table C 8 NAT Commands 1 of 3 no ip nat inside outside Minimum Access Level
331. ront panel DSL LED is on LOS Loss Of Signal An LOS condition has been detected on the network The front panel ALM LED is on Training Training in Progress The unit is training and the DSL LED is flashing LCD Loss of Cell Delineation An LCD alarm condition has been detected On the 9783 the front panel ATM LED is yellow Network Inte rface 9720 OK DSL Line OK The unit has trained up and is operating in normal data mode The front panel DSL LED is on LMI OK LMI Operating The LMI is operating successfully on the first frame relay link on the network interface Port 1 CSU DSUs only OK Port 1 is Active The user data port is transmitting and receiving data TXD Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device DTR Data Terminal Ready The DTE is not ready to operate RTS Request to Send The DTE has indicated that it is ready to transmit data Ethernet OK Ethernet is Active The Ethernet connection is transmitting and receiving data December 2002 7 7 7 Operation and Maintenance Device Messages Messages in Table 7 3 Device Messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the user interface screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 7 3 Device Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is
332. rotocol 807D 807F Vitalink Communications 5208 BBN Simnet 8080 Vitalink TransLAN III 6000 DEC Unassigned Exp 8081 8083 Counterpoint Computers 6001 DEC MOP Dump Load 809B Appletalk 6002 DEC MOP Remote Console 809C 809E Datability 6003 DEC DECNET Phase IV Route 809F Spider Systems Ltd 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 C 29 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 14 Ethernet Type Codes Hex 2 of 2 Type Code Description Type Code Description 6004 DEC LAT 80A3 Nixdorf Computers 6005 DEC Diagnostic Protocol 80A4 80B3 Siemens Gammasonics Inc Xerox 6006 DEC Customer Protocol 80C0 80C3 DCA Data Exchange Cluster Xerox 6007 DEC LAVC SCA 80C6 Pacer Software 6008 6009 DEC Unassigned 80C7 Applitek Corporation 6010 6014 3Com Corporation 80C8 80CC Intergraph Corporation 7000 Ungermann Bass download 80CD 80CE Harris Corporation 7002 Ungermann Bass dia loop 80CF 80D2 Taylor Instrument 7020 7029 LRT 80D3 80D4 Rosemount Corporation 7030 Proteon 80D5 IBM SNA Service on Ether 7034 Cabletron 80DD Varian Associates 8003 Cronus VLN 80DE 80DF Integrated Solutions TRFS 8004 Cronus Direct 80E0 80E3 Allen Bradley 8005 HP Probe 80E4 80F0 Datability 8006 Nestar 80F2 Retix 8008 AT amp T 80F3 AppleTalk AARP Kinetics 8010 Excelan 80F4 80F5 Kinetics 8013 SGI diagnostics 80F7 Apollo Computer 8
333. rt 1 is deasserted The DTR control lead on the device connected to the specified port is off This message applies to data ports that act as DCEs Examine the attached DTE and cable connected to the system s port m Check that the port cable is securely attached at both ends m Check the status of the attached equipment Ethernet Mgmt Down CSU DSU only minor alarm The Ethernet management interface is down The port is enabled and is the primary interface for management data but communication between the management system and the unit is not possible Check the management system Ethernet Port Down Router only The communication link for the Ethernet port is down and the Interface Status for the port is enabled Check the LAN connected to the Ethernet port 1 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 3 8 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LatExceed IP_Address COSx DLCInnnn An IP SLV Latency Threshold has been exceeded for the specified Class Of Service of the path Contact your service provider Link Down Administratively CSU DSU only minor alarm The DTE port is disabled through software Enable the port LMI Discovery in Progress CSU DSU only minor alarm LMI protocol discovery is being performed Wait LM
334. rt num static ip addr2 Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config Allows a user to specify or remove Network Address Translation rules Both dynamic and static address translations may be specified Command forms that include an access list are used to specify dynamic translation rules Packets from addresses that match the access list are translated using addresses allocated from the named pool or the IP address assigned to the interface No NAT rules are configured by default Example Refer to Chapter 4 Configuration Options inside Inside address translation converts an inside private IP address to an outside public IP address and port if overload is specified for NAPT source Specifies source address translation list Specify the access list number for dynamic address translation For inside source translation this access list describes local addresses If no rules have been created for the specified access list no translations based on this rule will occur access list 1 99num A standard IP Access list The valid range is 1 99 Continued on next page December 2002 C 13 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 14 Table C 8 NAT Commands 3 of 3 Continued from previous page pool Specify the name of a pool of addresses available for dynamic address translation For inside source translation this is the pool of local addresses pool name
335. rts of the network m Remote Advanced SLM Feature activation for units with the Diagnostic Feature Set Multiple maintenance schedules for scheduling more than one maintenance period with a report for each scheduled task Multiple Circuit IDs for multiple access levels so customers as well as network service providers have access to network management information m Device reset capability m HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Instructions for installing the OpenLane SLM system are found in the OpenLane SLM Administrator s Guide In addition to installation instructions the Administrators Guide contains instructions for Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services Accessing the OpenLane application Adding a FrameSaver device Adding a Customer ID OpenLane SLM also has an extensive online Help system December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Device Setting Up FrameSaver Support With OpenLane SLM s extensive online Help the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information B gt Procedure To set up FrameSaver support 1 2 O a A W Start the OpenLane services then access the application Log in as Admin for access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create custom
336. s DSL Network Interface 9720 Line code Service supported Data rates 6 position modular unkeyed RJ11 type jack 2B1Q IDSL T1 601 1992 64 128 144 kbps DSL Network Interface 9783 Line code Service supported Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed RJ45 type jack 2B1Q SDSL 144 2320 kbps DSL Network Interface 9788 Line code Service supported Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed RJ45 type jack TC PAM SHDSL G 991 2 200 2312 kbps Ethernet Port Standard Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed RJ45 jack ANSI IEEE Standard 802 3 Ethernet Version 2 10 100BaseT auto sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet rates Data Port 9720 CSU DSU 9783 CSU DSU Standard Data rates 34 position V 35 connector V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Automatically set to the network rate Data Port 9788 CSU DSU Standards Data rates 25 position EIA 530 A connector EIA 530 A V 35 ITU ISO 2593 X 21 Automatically set to match the network payload December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Equipment List Equipment See Cables on page G 5 for cables you can order Description Model Number FrameSaver DSL 9720 CSU DSUs FrameSaver DSL 9720 CSU DSU with 8 PVCs and the Diagnostic 9720 A1 211 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable V 35 Adapter and Installation Instructions FrameSaver DSL 9720 CSU DSU with 8 PVCs and Advanced SLM 9720 A1
337. s 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV latency measurements below the error threshold that must be received before the error status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications 4 18 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring General System Options 9700 A2 GB20 20 Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 4 6 General Options Main Menu gt Configuration System General Table 4 6 General Options Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines if loopback and pattern tests terminate automatically This setting does not effect DTE commanded tests or the LMI Packet Capture Utility feature Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have an automatic timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is
338. s interval used when generating alarms and alarm thresholds m Table B 9 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults m Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults m Table B 11 DLC Alarm Defaults See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps on page B 6 for information about how traps work and Trap RMON Specific on page B 13 for traps specific to remote monitoring Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state B 14 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit s network interface Table B 9 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Tag pdnifExtTotalUASs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 12 1 1 1 4 1 Threshold Default Sample Event Item Type MIB Tag OID Interval Type Rising Falling Unavailable D MIB pdn_FrExt mib Enterprise 900 secs Rising 1 1 Seconds 15 mins 1 D Delta The calculated differe
339. s the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows COM port subnet mask which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the IP address class Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 December 2002 4 61 4 Configuration Options Table 4 25 Communication Port Options 4 of 4 RIP Possible Settings None Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option appears only when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be config
340. s made to add a static NAT translation but the maximum number of translations have already been reached Keyword static was entered with two IP addresses but no protocol specified Maximum number of dynamic PAT translations rules reached An attempt was made to add a dynamic PAT translation but the maximum number of translations have already been reached Keywords list and either pool or interface and overload are specified Maximum number of static PAT translations reached An attempt was made to add a static PAT translation but the maximum number of translations have already been reached Keywords static and interface were entered that specify two IP addresses protocol and a local TCP UDP port number Maximum number of sub interfaces already exist An attempt was made to create a new sub interface but the maximum number of sub interfaces have already been created NAT pool does not exist The NAT pool entered does not exist NAT pools can t have more than 254 IP addresses The number of IP addresses in a NAT pool cannot exceed 254 NAT Prefix range is 24 32 An attempt was made to enter a prefix length that is outside the valid range NAT Translation timeout must be in the range 0 2147483647 An attempt was made to enter a NAT timeout that is outside the valid range Next Hop IP address is assigned to an interface The route entered with a Next Hop IP addre
341. s made to specify the ARP timeout on an interface other than the Ethernet port ARP Timeout must in the range 0 4294967 An attempt was made to specify an ARP timeout that is outside the valid range Bridge group filter already exists An attempt was made to create an already existing bridge filter rule Bridge group filter does not exist The bridge group filter specified for deletion does not exist Bridge group filter list is full An attempt was made to add a bridge filter rule but the maximum number of rules have already been created Bridge group not assigned An attempt was made to remove a non existent bridge group assignment Destination IP address is already part of an interface route The route entered for a destination IP address is within the IP address range assigned to the interface DHCP max clients must be 1 MaximumDHCPClients An attempt was made to enter an invalid DHCP client limit DHCP network does not exist An attempt was made to delete a non existent DHCP network DHCP Network Prefix range 1 32 An attempt was made to enter an invalid prefix length DHCP pool does not exist An attempt was made to delete a non existent DHCP pool December 2002 7 13 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 4 CLI Messages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates DLCI number must be 16 1007 The DLCI entered is not in
342. s with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m Configuration Option Tables in Chapter 4 Configuration Options m FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU Models 9783 and 9788 Quick Reference or FrameSaver DSL Router Models 9783 and 9788 Quick Reference If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Scratchpad Configuration An alternate configuration area for temporary use The Scratchpad configuration is reset to the factory default settings when the unit is powered off and on Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can save changes only to the Current Customer or Scratchpad configuration option areas The Current Customer and Scratchpad configuration option areas are initially identical with the Default Factory Configuration December 20
343. scard Eligible bit set 4 43 Default Gateway Address 4 58 Default IP Destination 4 39 DefaultCodePoints 4 13 Delete key 2 6 2 9 December 2002 IN 3 Index deleting a login 6 14 designations ICMP C 31 TCP port C 33 UDP port C 34 Destination based routing 5 3 Default IP 4 39 DLCI 4 36 EDLCI 4 36 Initial Route 4 54 Link 4 36 Device messages 7 8 8 2 troubleshooting problems 8 12 DHCP 5 11 Relay Agent 5 13 CLI commands C 18 configuration example 5 14 server at remote site configuration example 5 13 CLI commands C 15 with NAT configuration example 5 12 diagnostic CLI commands C 23 Diagnostic Feature Set 1 4 Dial In Access 4 63 disabling ILMI 4 27 SNMP access 6 8 Discard Eligible DE bit set 4 43 Disconnect Time Minutes 4 49 4 61 discovering elements DLCls 10 3 displaying configuration options 3 4 identity information 7 2 LEDs and control leads 7 3 DLCI 4 43 9720 network interface 4 23 configuring 4 32 Destination 4 36 Down 7 20 8 8 on SLV Timeout 4 17 IP Enabled 4 32 LMlI reported status 7 23 Number 4 24 4 32 Priority 4 34 Records 4 32 Virtual Router and Data Ports 4 32 Source 4 35 statistics 7 34 Traps on Interfaces 4 55 Type 4 25 4 32 VPI VCl correlation 1 5 DNS 5 11 IN 4 December 2002 downloading current router configuration 5 18 determining when completed 7 47 guidelines for 7 44 MIBs and SNMP traps B 2 software 7 46 DSL cable E 4 fr
344. setting is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Circuit Record prompt appears If you select m No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The link designation is removed the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI and or VPI VCI are deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Access Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management Link PVC Upon receiving five Ping packets with the same destination address within five seconds this management link assumes the IP address of the destination address This selection appears only when a dedicated management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay or ATM link TS Management Link Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session using the TS Access Management Link Display Conditions This option does not appear if TS Access Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 4 21 Telnet and FTP Session Options Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session op
345. setting or value appears to the right of the field You can enter information in up to four ways Select the field then If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings Manually type in the field value or command For example the Device Name field on the System Information screen is initially blank Type a name into the input area next to Device Name Device Name MyDeviceName Manually type in the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Type as many characters as are required to have the software distinguish one option from another For example when configuring the Network ATM option FRF 8 Encapsulation Mode the default option Transparent is at first displayed typing transl causes the option Translational to be displayed Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key For example Save is one of the available commands in the function keys area of configuration screens To save a configuration option change press Ctrl A and s or S The s key is the designated function key for Save December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Navigating the Router s CLI Access the FrameSaver DSL Routers Command Line Interface by pressing the Shift r funct
346. src end port Continued on next page December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Table C 11 Filter Commands 3 of 4 For Extended IP Access Lists continued src port Specify a TCP or UDP port number to be filtered Valid if the protocol specified is tcp or udp Refer to Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid port number range is O 65535 srce end port Specifies last TCP or UDP port number in a range of port numbers to be filtered Valid if the protocol specified is tcp or udp and if src operator value is range Refer to Table C 16 TCP Port Designations and Table C 17 UDP Port Designations Valid port number range is O 65535 dest operator Specifies how the destination port is evaluated This argument may only be specified if the protocol specified is tcp or udp Valid values are eq Match only packets with a port number equal to the destination port number gt Match only packets with a port number greater than the destination port number It Match only packets with a port number less than the destination port number neq Match only packets with a port number not equal to the destination port number range Match only packets in the range of port numbers specified by dest port and dest end port If range is specified enter both a dest port and dest end port dest port Specifies a specific TCP or UDP
347. ss Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM statistics from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics ATM ATM link Net1 ATM must be enabled for these statistics to appear Table 7 17 ATM Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates AAL5 ATM Adaption Layer Tx PDUs Number of AAL5 Common Part Convergence Sublayer CPCS Protocol Data Units PDUs passed to the lower layer for transmission Rx PDUs Number of AAL5 PDUs received and passed to a higher layer Tx Octets Number of AAL5 octets bytes passed to the lower layer for transmission Rx Octets Number of AAL5 octets bytes received and passed to a higher layer Errored Tx PDUs Number of AAL5 PDUs that could not be transmitted due to errors Errored Rx PDUs Number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received that contained errors OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance Total Tx OAM Cells Number of OAM cells transmitted Total Rx OAM Cells Number of OAM cells received TC Transmission Co nvergence Sublayer Total Tx Cells Number of cells transmitted Total Rx Cells Number of cells received Total Rx Cells Number of cells received and dropped due to errors Dropped Rx HEC Errors Number of cells received with HEC field errors Unknown Rx Cells Number of cells received and discarded during cell header validation These include cells with m Unrecogni
348. ss is the IP address assigned to the interface Next Hop IP address must fall within the IP address range assigned to the interface The route entered with a Next Hop IP address does not fall within the IP address range for the interface Only bridge group 1 is supported at this time A bridge group was specified that is outside the valid range Ping packets must be between 0 1500 bytes An attempt was made to initiate a Ping test with a packet length that is outside the valid range Ping timeout must be between 1 30 seconds An attempt was made to initiate a Ping test with a timeout that is outside the valid range PVC already assigned to sub interface sub interface The DLCI is already assigned on an interface other than the current sub interface PVC is already defined The DLCI is already defined on the current sub interface December 2002 7 15 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 4 CLI Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates Sub interfaces are only supported on the Serial 0 Interface An attempt was made to enter a sub interface on the Ethernet port Sub interface does not exist An attempt was made to create a route using a non existent sub interface Sub interface in use Sub interface uses must be removed first An attempt was made to delete a sub interface that is currently in use Perform the following configuration ch
349. st unknown 3 8 host isolated Source host isolated 3 9 dod net prohibited Destination network admin prohibited 3 10 dod host prohibited Destination host admin prohibited 3 11 net tos unreachable Network unreachable for TOS Type of Service 3 12 host tos unreachable Host unreachable for TOS 3 13 Administratively prohibited Communication admin prohibited by filtering 3 14 host precedence unreachable Host precedence violation 3 15 precedence unreachable Precedence cutoff in effect 4 0 source quench Source quench flow control 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 C 31 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 32 Table C 15 ICMP Designations 2 of 2 Type Code ICMP Message Description All 5n All redirects 5 0 net redirect Redirect for network 5 1 host redirect Redirect for host 5 2 net tos redirect Redirect for Type of Service TOS amp network 5 3 host tos redirect Redirect for Type of Service TOS amp host 8 0 echo Echo request ping 9 0 router advertisement Router discovery advertisements 10 0 router solicitation Router discovery solicitations 11 0 ttl exceeded TTL Time to Live 0 amp exceeded during transit Traceroute 11 1 reassembly timeout TTL Time to Live 0 amp exceeded during reassembly 12 0 general parameter problem IP header bad 12 1 option missing Parameter required but not present
350. ster Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field m Try again m Contact your system administrator to verify your password Permission Denied Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but the m User did not have Level 1 security Wrong file was specified when the put command was entered m User attempted to upload a program file from the unit m See your system administrator to get your security level changed m Try again entering the correct file with the put command m Enter the put command instead of a get command you can only transfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software on page 7 46 Please Wait Command takes longer than 5 seconds Wait until message clears Port Inactive The port is disabled No action is needed Requested action aborted Reason Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was aborted for the Reason shown m Invalid file or model number m Invalid file checksum m Insufficient memory m File database version does not match device database version m File slot config does not match device slot config Download the correct configuration file m Download a different file Notify your service representative Download the correct configuration file m Download the correct configuration file 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 11 7 O
351. sts 8 18 troubleshooting problems 8 14 Q QoS 4 34 Quality of Service 4 34 R Rate configurable FTP transfer 1 4 Rate Kbps Data 4 59 DSL Line 4 6 4 21 4 22 FTP Max Transfer 4 50 Network DSL Line 4 6 rear panels E 2 Region Setting 4 22 reports At a Glance 10 6 10 8 certificate summary 9 9 Exception 10 7 generating 10 6 grouping elements 10 5 Network Health 10 7 printed 10 7 Service Level 10 6 10 8 Summary 10 7 Trend 10 7 10 10 resetting last time 7 19 statistics 7 42 the unit 8 3 restoring communication with improperly configured unit 8 4 current router configuration 5 18 retrieving statistics 7 48 RFC 2474 4 15 RfcCodePoints 4 13 RIP 4 62 Primary Link 4 45 Proprietary 4 54 IN 10 December 2002 RMON alarm and event defaults B 14 alarms and configurable thresholds 1 6 Specific Traps B 13 Traps 4 56 user history collection 1 5 1 6 Round Trip Latency Error Threshold 4 18 router CLI messages 7 13 configuration using terminal emulation 5 18 configuring using terminal emulation 5 18 controlling CLI access 6 11 filtering 5 15 independence 1 4 interfaces 5 2 menu structure A 4 port physical options 4 32 security 5 15 Virtual DLCI Records 4 32 Routing Information Protocol RIP 4 62 IP 5 3 table 7 27 table 5 3 RTS control lead 7 7 Monitor 4 29 running reports 10 6 RXD control lead 7 7 S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval 4 16 saving config
352. system designers engineers administrators and operators who are familiar with the operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks NOTE In this manual CSU DSU refers to the line termination capability of the DSL endpoint and does not imply association with traditional T1 or DDS equipment Document Organization Section Description Chapter 1 About FrameSaver DSL Devices Identifies how FrameSaver DSL devices fit into Paradyne s Service Level Management SLM solution and describes the unit s basic unique and advanced features Chapter 2 User and Command Line Interfaces and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the menu driven user interface and the router s Command Line Interface CLI Chapter 3 Configuration Procedures Shows how to access and save configuration options Chapter 4 Configuration Options Describes the configuration options available for the devices Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router Describes the FrameSaver DSL Router s interfaces and features with sample router scenarios and how to configure the router 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 ix About This Guide Section Description Chapter 6 Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the device and setting up logins Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display device identific
353. t on page 8 7 Alarms on page 8 8 Viewing the Trap Event Log on page 8 11 Troubleshooting Tables on page 8 11 Tests Available on page 8 15 Starting and Stopping a Test on page 8 17 PVC Tests on page 8 18 Network ATM Loopback on page 8 21 Data Port Physical Tests on page 8 23 IP Ping Test on page 8 24 Lamp Test on page 8 30 December 2002 8 1 8 Troubleshooting Problem Indicators The device provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators See LEDs Viewing LEDs and Control Leads in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance and the user interface screen Main Menu Status Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and status Health and Status Messages in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance Messages appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Device messages Device Messages in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance Messages appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance to determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions Alarms on page 8 8 SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 8 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the unit in one of four ways m Reset it from
354. ted Default Setting Routed This read only field specifies that the IP encapsulation used is RFC 1490 RFC 2427 routed Network Level Protocol IDentifier NLPID encapsulation and not SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP encapsulation Display Conditions This option appears only if the PVC is Payload Managed or IP Enabled Routed IP encapsulation is routed NLPID 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 45 4 Configuration Options Configuring General SNMP Management 4 46 Using SNMP protocols the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an NUS SNMP agent You must have Level 1 access to display or configure these options Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete configuration information see Table 4 20 General SNMP Management Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management Table 4 20 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages or send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the F
355. ter CLI Commands Codes and Designations Interface Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 Interface commands allow you to configure the Ethernet and network interfaces and their sub interfaces Table C 4 Interface Commands 1 of 3 interface intf type intf num no interface intf type intf num sub intf num point to point Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config config if config subif Allows you to enter interface or sub interface configuration mode and create sub interfaces All commands entered while in interface or sub interface configuration mode are applied to the specified interface or sub interface No sub interfaces are enabled by default Example interface serial 132 53 4 2 132 53 4 250 Use the no interface command to delete sub interfaces while in config mode The command does not delete interfaces When a sub interface that is currently in use is deleted all sub interface uses are automatically removed from the system configuration This includes all route entries destined for the sub interface ip addresses and subnets for the sub interface and all frame relay DLCls bridge group assignments and ip nat inside outside assignments configured on the sub interface intf type Serial interface is supported the frame relay serial interface SDSL network interface intf num Interface index number for the Serial interface Valid range is from 0 up to the maximum number of serial interfaces min
356. ter connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 The LMI state for Port 1 and the Net1 FR1 interface are dependent on each other If the LMI is down on either interface the system will bring the LMI down on the other interface When the LMI is up on either interface the system will bring the LMI up on the other interface When Port 1 LMI goes down in addition to bringing down the internal network frame relay link the unit also sends F5 OAM cells on all network VCs cross connected to Port 1 DLCls to alert the network and far end device that frame relay data can not be delivered through the device Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit Note that when the router is disconnected the NSP cannot access the unit using multiplexed VCs LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors before reported LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter with the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies
357. terface index number for the Ethernet and the Serial interfaces 0 sub intf num The sub interface number is only supported on the Network interface Serial 0 The following sub interface numbers are supported 0 4 294 967 295 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Show Commands 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations Show commands allow you to display information Table C 13 Show Commands 1 of 4 show arp Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays the devices in the ARP table The general format of the show arp command is IP Address Timeout min MAC address Type Interface X X X X STATIC XX XX XX XX XX XX ARPA X X X X time XX XX XX XX XX XX ARPA Interface The first column displays the IP address The second column displays the actual time left for the specific entry or STATIC for configured static entries The third column displays the MAC address for the ARP entry The fourth column displays the ARP type only ARPA is currently supported The fifth column displays the Interface or sub interface for the ARP table entry show bridge Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database show configuration Minimum Access Level Operator Command Mode Standard Displays outputs a sequence of commands in the form of ASCII strings that have the effect of setting all con
358. the Control menu m Cycle the power m Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings m Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS refer to your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power on self test of the unit p gt Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 From the Main Menu screen select Control 2 Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears 3 Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 3 8 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit Configuring the unit improperly could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal B gt Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 Kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication on page 8 3 for other methods of
359. the Invalid Test Combination message is displayed m If the ATM link is not active when the ATM Ping is started the Link Inactive message is displayed This test cannot be run when a physical test is already active on the interface and no physical test can be run on the interface when the ATM Loopback is active on the interface 8 22 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Data Port Physical Tests DTE Loopback 9700 A2 GB20 20 The FrameSaver DSL CSU DSU supports a single physical test for the data port the DTE Loopback This test does not appear for the router The local DTE external Loopback DTLB loops the received signal on the DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test to isolate problems on the user data port Main Menu Test Data Port Physical Tests User Data DTLB ei Port 99 16284 An attached device or test equipment must generate the data to be looped back and the Port DTE Initiated Loopback option must be enabled Refer to Configuring the CSU DSU s Data Port Physical Interface in Chapter 4 Configuration Options CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs for the port Any data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted December 2002 8 23 8 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping can test connectivity between the management data path and the FrameSaver unit and any Fram
360. the network interface 4 23 frame relay on CSU DSU s dataport 4 30 general SNMP management 4 46 general system options 4 19 Management and Communication 4 38 management PVCs 4 41 network interfaces 4 20 node information 4 38 overall system 4 10 PVC connections 4 35 router 5 18 SLV options 4 16 SNMP NMS security 4 51 SNMP traps 4 53 Telnet and FTP Sessions 4 48 Connectivity test 8 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 Index Control keys 2 6 lead descriptions 7 6 Leads and LEDs 7 3 Leads Ignore 4 60 menu 2 4 Monitor RTS 4 29 Set Operating Mode 4 8 System Information 4 8 controlling asynchronous terminal access 6 3 CLI access 6 11 external device access 6 4 FTP access 6 4 SNMP access 6 8 Telnet access 6 4 conversation elements 10 3 COS applying SLV measurements 4 17 performance statistics 7 35 CRC 7 37 Create a Dedicated Network Management Link 4 5 creating a login 6 13 CSU DSU configuring data port 4 28 frame relay and LMI 4 10 frame relay on data port 4 30 menu structure A 2 CTS down 8 8 to Port Device 7 20 current software revision 7 2 D Data Delivery Ratio DDR 1 6 Inverse ARP for 1 2 Link Control Identifier DLCI 4 43 Mode control lead 7 7 Port DLCI Records 4 23 4 32 physical options 4 28 pin assignments 9720 and 9783 E 7 pin assignments 9788 E 8 Rate Kbps 4 59 selection criteria 2 1 uploading SLV and packet capture 7 48 Date and Time setting 4 8 DE Di
361. tination Interface is set to Use_Internal_Route Routed The encapsulation is routed NLPID TOS Byte Available Settings A predefined COS ID or a user defined binary value 0000 1111 Default Setting User Defined 000000 Release 2 1 Specifies the TOS Terms Of Service byte to be used with the ping packet Select from COS Class Of Service definitions if any exist or specify a binary value When a COS definition is selected the TOS byte value is read only If you select a COS definition that has multiple COS IDs the lowest value is used as the TOS byte See Configuring Class of Service Definitions in Chapter 4 Configuration Options 0000 1111 The value of the TOS byte Packet Size Available Settings 36 4096 Default Setting 100 Specifies the size of the ping packet including the IP header 20 bytes and the ICMP header 8 bytes 1 4096 Packet size Iteration Count Available Settings 1 999999 Default Setting 5 Specifies the number of pings to send 1 999999 Number of pings Inter Ping Delay Available Settings 1 900 Default Setting 1 Specifies in seconds the amount of time to wait between pings 1 900 The ping wait time Response Timeout Available Settings 1 60 Default Setting 2 Specifies the amount of time in seconds to wait before a host that has not responded to a ping is declared unreachable 1 60 The response
362. tion IP Address to ignore during matches This argument must be supplied when a dest ip address is specified any Specifies to match any destination host A dest ip of 0 0 0 0 and a dest wildcard of 255 255 255 255 are specified host Specify a single host address to match dest host ip The destination host IP address to match icmp msg type Specify a specific ICMP message type to be filtered Valid if the protocol specified is icmp For valid ICMP message types refer to Table C 15 ICMP Designations Valid ICMP message type range is 0 255 icmp msg code Specify a specific CMP message code to be filtered Valid if an icmp msg type has been specified and the protocol specified is icmp For valid ICMP message codes refer to Table C 15 ICMP Designations Valid ICMP message type range is 0 255 src operator Specifies how the source port is evaluated This argument may only be specified if the protocol specified is tcp or udp Valid values are eq Match only packets with a port number equal to the source port number input gt Match only packets with a port number greater than the source port number It Match only packets with a port number less than the source port number input neq Match only packets with a port number not equal to the source port number range Match only packets in the range of port numbers specified by src port and src end port If range is specified enter both a src port and a
363. tion settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information add change and display configuration options and perform device testing This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to monitor and perform tests and display status and configuration option information they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to monitor and display status and configuration screens only they cannot change configuration options or run tests December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring Management PVCs To define inband management links select Management PVCs see Table 4 19 Management PVC Options First configure the DLCI interface records at the Management PVC location See Configuring Circuit Records for the Network Interface 9783 9788 on page 4 24 or Configuring DLCI Records on page 4 32 for additional information Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a TS Management Link see Confi
364. to 300 entries for the management IP routing table When an IP address and subnet mask are assigned to an interface an entry is automatically created in the IP routing table Address Resolution Protocol Proxy ARP 9700 A2 GB20 20 The router supports Address Resolution Protocol ARP as specified in RFC 826 The router provides for 256 ARP table entries The timeout for completed and uncompleted ARP table entries is configurable The Command Line Interface provides the ability to m Create up to 64 static ARP table entries to be retained across power cycles m Display the ARP table m Delete ARP table entries m Display and delete automatically added static ARP table entries by the DHCP server and relay functions Refer to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server on page 5 11 The router supports Proxy ARP Proxy ARP responses are based on the contents of the IP routing table for management traffic The IP routing table for management traffic must have an entry for every host that is reachable on the Ethernet interface including hosts for which the router will not forward packets because of IP filters For additional information on filtering refer to P Filtering on page 5 16 If an ARP request is received on one interface for an IP address that is reachable on the other interface the router will respond with its own MAC address Proxy ARP is enabled via the user interface Refer to Configuring Ethernet Management in Chapter 4 C
365. ts 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 43 7 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers FrameSaver devices support a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP To provide backup a complete binary image of the configuration files can be copied to a host To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files to a FrameSaver node and User History data from a FrameSaver node through the user data port CSU DSU only or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer m You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands However you can retrieve the data file for user history reports regardless of your access level m You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before you put a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When tra
366. ts Bey m 1 9999 m The average time in milliseconds that it took to complete a ping during this test December 2002 8 27 8 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test Procedure 1 B gt Procedure To ping any far end FrameSaver device 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address to ping then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit or the far end unit has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished ALive should appear as the Status If any other message is displayed additional testing is required 8 28 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test Procedure 2 p gt Procedure To ping the NMS at the central site or an SNMP trap manager 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 2 Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 3 Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu Configuration gt Management and Commu
367. ular port it can be used with the Node IP address for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the IP address class Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Default IP Destination Possible Settings None COM Ethernet PVCname Default Setting None Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route NOTE If the link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the data which cannot be routed will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down the default destination is changed CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations multiplied by the retry count None No default IP network destination is specified Unrouteable data is discarded This is the recommended setting COM Specifies that the default IP destination is the COM port Appears only when Port Use
368. ult router ip address no default router p address Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to configure or remove the default router IP address provided to clients by the DHCP server The default router address is provided to the clients in the DHCP reply message from the DHCP server and as the next hop router by the clients The IP address for the default router should be on the same subnet as the client Example default router 132 53 4 2 ip address Specifies the IP address of the default router The default is None domain name domain name no domain name domain name Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or remove the domain name provided to clients by the DHCP server This domain name is provided to the clients in the DHCP reply message from the DHCP server domain name Specifies a string defining the domain name The domain name string contains 255 ASCII printable characters The default is None dns server p address no dns server p address Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config dhcp Allows you to specify or remove the Domain Name System DNS IP address provided to clients by the DHCP server Example dns server 132 53 4 2 ip address Specifies the IP address of the DNS server December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Des
369. unication with the far end device is not successful Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 4 5 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 samples If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 samples appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 samples has not been successful For an IP Enabled DLCI statistics are shown for last minimum average and maximum round trips and for dropped SLV responses for each of the seven classes of service Table 7 13 SLY Performance Statistics for IP Enabled DLCI 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the DLCI connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Pat
370. uration option changes 3 5 scheduled activations 9 8 9 9 Scrambling Cell Payload 4 27 Scratchpad Configuration 3 3 screen area 2 5 how to navigate 2 6 scrolling through valid selections 2 8 security 1 4 2 1 2 2 3 5 6 1 COM port 4 60 FTP 4 50 router 5 15 SNMP NMS 4 51 Telnet 4 48 selecting DSLAM type 4 4 selecting from a menu 2 7 Self Test Failure alarm 8 10 Results messages 7 19 Send Pattern 8 19 9700 A2 GB20 20 serial number of the NAM 7 2 server DHCP 5 11 Service A service level reports 10 6 verification configuring 4 16 statistics 7 30 Service Level reports 10 8 Session Access Level 4 49 6 5 ending 2 3 FTP 4 49 starting 2 2 Telnet 4 48 Set DE 4 43 Set Operating Mode 4 8 setting Date and Time system clock 4 8 operating mode 4 8 setting up in band management 5 17 Management and Communication 4 38 SHDSL statistics 7 40 tests 8 23 Shift r to access router s CLI 2 6 show CLI commands C 25 configuration command 5 18 SLA 1 6 SLM features 1 6 OpenLane 9 2 OpenLane system 1 9 performance monitoring feature set 1 7 SLA verification and reporting 1 6 SLV configuring 4 16 Delivery Ratio 4 17 DLCI Down on Timeout 4 17 Latency Exceeded alarm 8 10 Packet Size 4 18 performance statistics 7 30 Round Trip Latency 4 18 Sample Interval secs 4 16 Synchronization Role 4 16 Timeout 7 21 alarm 8 10 Error Event Threshold 4 18 type 4 17 smurf
371. ured packet message either Status Message or Status Enquiry Message and the number of packet bytes The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet m The type of information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The Send and Receive Rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 m On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCIs can be shown including the DLCI number the active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCI s CIR value 8 6 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Telnet The Telnet feature allows you to initiate a Telnet session with a Telnet server on an IP aware device Telnet is available with firmware release 2 1 and above Control Telnet Telnet Example main control telnet 9720 Device Name Node A 09 11 2002 13 37 TELNET Target IP Address 000 000 000 000 Clear Destination Interface Net1 FR1 DLCI Start Escape Character is Ctrl Status Idle Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Refresh PgUp PgDn B gt Procedure To initiate a Telnet session from the FrameSaver device 1 Enter an IP address and select Use_Internal_Route or select a destination interface Net1 FR1 or Port 1 Clicking on Clear resets the IP address to 000 000 000 000 2 Enter a DLCI or for ATM links a VPI and
372. ured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM Port IP information has been set up refer to Configuring Node IP Information on page 4 38 4 62 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Select External Modem Com Port to display or change the configuration options that control COM port external device call processing see Table 4 26 External Modem COM Port Options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port NOTE A standard EIA 232 crossover cable is required when connecting an external modem to the FrameSaver unit s COM port See DB25 to DB25 Crossover Cable or DB9 to DB25 Crossover Cable in Appendix E Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments for cable pin assignments Table 4 26 External Modem COM Port Options External Modem Commands Possible Settings Disable AT Default Setting Disable Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port CAUTION Do not use this setting when an async terminal is connected to the COM port see Table 4 25 Communication Port Options Disable Commands will not be sent over the COM port AT Standard Attention AT Commands are sent over the COM port to control the external device All AT command strings will end
373. uring Circuit Records for the Network Interface 9783 9788 Configuring ATM for the Network Interface 9783 9788 Configuring the User Data or Virtual Router Port on page 4 28 Configuring the CSU DSU s Data Port Physical Interface Configuring Frame Relay on the CSU DSU s Data Port Configuring DLCI Records m Configuring PVC Connections on page 4 35 Configuring the IP Path List on page 4 37 m Setting Up Management and Communication on page 4 38 Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management December 2002 4 1 4 Configuration Options Configuring Telnet and or FTP Sessions Configuring SNMP NMS Security Configuring SNMP Traps Configuring Ethernet Management Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Default settings for some parameters may be different than shown here for models with customer specific factory settings See Chapter 5 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router for additional configuration information when setting up the router 4 2 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 4 Configuration Options Using the Easy Install Feature An Easy Install screen is provided for custom configurations but is not required for normal installation The FrameSaver Easy Install feature provides minimal configuration Once the installation and configuration are complete the NOC can complete u
374. us one sub intf num Sub interfaces are only supported on the network interface Serial 0 Valid range for the sub interface is O 4 294 967 295 point to point Specifies a point to point sub interface By default all sub interfaces are point to point December 2002 C 5 C Router CLI Commands Codes and Designations C 6 Table C 4 Interface Commands 2 of 3 ip address p addr subnet mask no ip address p addr subnet mask Minimum Access Level Administrator Command Mode config if Ethernet config subif Serial Assigns an IP address to the Ethernet interface or a Serial port sub interface No IP addresses are assigned to interfaces or sub interfaces by default Example ip address 132 53 4 2 255 255 255 255 Use the no ip address command to remove an IP address assigned to an interface or sub interface and disable IP processing on the interface The following rules apply m Each sub interface must be assigned to a different subnet A customer data IP address and subnet mask must be different from any IP address used for management m When an IP address and subnet mask are assigned to an interface or sub interface the device automatically creates a routing table entry with the same destination address and subnet mask saying that IP addresses within that range are directly reachable on the interface This is the interface route m If the maximum number of static routes have already bee
375. vider SNR Margin Threshold Exceed Network 1 The user specified Signal to Noise Ratio SNR margin threshold for the network interface has been exceeded Contact your network provider Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Another user with Level 1 security access is currently accessing the unit Be aware that actions of the other user may override your test commands and configuration changes Wait until no other Level 1 users are accessing the unit if testing or configuration will be performed 1 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 8 Troubleshooting Viewing the Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps in Appendix B SNMP MIBs Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults See Trap Event Log in Chapter 7 Operation and Maintenance for a screen example and additional information Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the following tables for possible solutions m Table 8 2 Device Problems m Table 8 3 ATM Problems m Table 8 4 Frame Relay PVC Problems 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 8 11 8 Troubleshooting Device Problems Table 8 2 Device Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solut
376. warded without being translated December 2002 4 7 4 Configuration Options Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit the location a contact for the unit and set the system clock Main Menu gt Control System Information The following information is available Save any entries or changes If the selection is Enter the Device Name Unique name to identify the device up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location up to 255 characters System Contact System person name and how to contact up to 255 characters ATM Location ID Identification of the ATM location for the system The ID must be entered as 16 one byte values each conveyed as two hexadecimal characters delimited by colons When Clear is selected all octets are filled with 6A for example 6A 6A 6A 6A which is the factory default and an invalid value The values are restricted m The first byte must be 01 02 03 FF or 6A m If the first octet is FF the octets 2 16 must also be FF m If the first octet is 6A the octets 2 16 must also be 6A Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes seconds format hh mm ss NOTE To clear existing informatio
377. with 64 PVCs and Advanced SLM Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9788 A1 321 For international models the country code is shown as xxx Contact your Paradyne sales office for the correct number December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 G Equipment List Description Model Number FrameSaver DSL 9783 Routers FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router with 8 PVCs and the Diagnostic 9783 A1 214 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router with 8 PVCs and Advanced SLM 9783 A1 224 Feature Sets Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router with 8 PVCs and the Diagnostic 9783 A1 314 xxx Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 or 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9783 Router with 8 PVCs and Advanced SLM 9783 A1 324 xxx Feature Sets Includes 1 Slot Housing 100 or 230 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Ferrite Choke Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver DSL 9788 Routers FrameSaver DSL 9788 Router with 8 PVCs and the Diagnostic 9788 A1 214 Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cab
378. with a carriage return hex 0x0D and a line feed hex Ox0A Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM port based on the Port Use option setting Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is disabled Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP network Disable Does not answer incoming calls 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 4 63 4 Configuration Options 4 64 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 Configuring the FrameSaver DSL Router This chapter includes the following m FrameSaver DSL Router Overview on page 5 2 m P Routing on page 5 3 m Address Resolution Protocol on page 5 3 m Proxy ARP on page 5 3 m Interface Configuration on page 5 4 IP Options Processing Applications Supported by NAT NAT Configuration Example m Network Address Port Translation on page 5 8 NAPT Configuration Example NAT and NAPT Configuration Example m Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server on page 5 11 DHCP Server with NAT Configuration Example DHCP Server at Remote Site Configuration Example m DHCP Relay Agent on page 5 13 DHCP Relay Configuration Example m Router Security on page 5 15 IP Router Filtering Bridge Filtering IP Filtering Land Bug Prevention Smurf Attack Pr
379. work 4 01 16991 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 7 3 7 Operation and Maintenance 7 4 In addition to LEDs control leads can be monitored via the menu driven user interface Main Menu gt Status Display LEDs and Control Leads The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The appropriate interfaces are shown on this screen with the active status highlighted Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a 9720 CSU DSU main status leds PARADYNE 23726 Device Name 61 61 1998 66 60 DISPLAY LEDs amp CONTROL LEADS IDSL FR NAM GENERAL NETWORK1 Port 1 OK 0 OK LMI OK TRD Test R amp D DIR RTS ESC for previous menu Exit Refresh LMI Down Net1 FR1i Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a 9783 CSU DSU main status leds PARADYNE 783 C SLU Device Name Nevis 3 0971172002 67 18 DISPLAY LEDs amp CONTROL LEADS DSL FR ATM NAM GENERAL NETWORK1 Port 1 Ow OK Alarm LOS TKD Test Training R LCD iD IR ESC for previous menu Exit Refresh December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 LED Descriptions 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a 9783 Router main status leds PARADYNE 783 RtrSLU Device Name Paradise Router 69711 2062 07 06 DISPLAY LEDs amp CONTROL LEADS DSL FR ATM NAM GENERAL NETWORK1i Ethernet 0 OK Alarm LOS Test Training LCD ATM Mode
380. y Menus The following table show the FrameSaver DSL devices menu organizations m FrameSaver DSL CSU DSUs Menu Structure on page A 2 m FrameSaver DSL Routers Menu Structure on page A 4 NOTE Actual menus may vary based on the model current configuration settings and feature set installed in the device 9700 A2 GB20 20 December 2002 A Menu Hierarchy FrameSaver DSL CSU DSUs Menu Structure Status System and Test Status Self Test Results Last System Reset Health and Status Test Status LMI Reported DLCls DLCI Status CIR bps IP Path Connection Status Device Name IP Address Status Discovery Source PVC Connection Status Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status IP Routing Table Destination Mask Gateway Hop Type Interface TTL Performance Statistics Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ATM 9783 9788 VCC 9783 9788 xDSL Line 9788 Ethernet Clear All Statistics Trap Event Log Number of Trap Events Time of Day Event Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity System NAM Test Network PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity 9783 9788 Data Port PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity Data Port Physical Tests DTE Loopback Network ATM Loopback Tests ATM Ping 9783 9788 IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests A 2
381. y m Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive m If the DLCI was Down this is the time since the DLCI recovered m If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Tx Octets m Within CIR m Between CIR amp EIR m Above EIR m With DE Set m With BECN Set Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes transmitted for the selected frame relay link DLCI The number of frames and octets m Received on the DLCI that were within the CIR m Sent by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate m Sent by the far end device on the DLCI that were above the EIR m Sent on the DLCI with the discard eligible bit set m BECNSs sent to notify users that there is data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Table 7 14 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Field What It Indicates Total Rx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received for Rx Octets the selected DLCI on the frame relay link The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI m Within CIR m That were within CIR Between m That were between CIR and EIR CIR amp EIR m Above EIR m That were above EIR m With DE Set m With the discard el
382. y volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page m At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance Report Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating 10 8 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 9700 A2 GB20 20 10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Device FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver device s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV advanced network statistics Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WAN Element Largo RedBank dici 10 895 Bytes in bytes sec Bytes Out bytes sec 100K 1
383. your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature since true statistic counts are always maintained to verify SLAs and to be available to view from an SNMP NMS Statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS because statistics can be locally cleared B gt Procedure To clear all statistics Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics p gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics m To reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI use the CIrSLV amp DLCIStats function key from one of the following screens Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics gt DLCI m To reset frame relay link performance statistics use the ClrLinkStats function key Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay m To reset Ethernet performance statistics use the ClrStats function key Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Ethernet 7 42 December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log The following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and for the fra
384. zed VPI VCI values m Invalid cell header patterns m Undefined Payload Type Indicators Last Unknown VPI VCl The VPI VCI of the last cell discarded due to an unrecognized VPI VCI If no such cells have been discarded None appears OCD Events Number of times OCD events have been detected when seven consecutive cells with HEC violations are detected Cell Delineation State Synchronization value In Sync or Out of Sync of the last cell received December 2002 9700 A2 GB20 20 7 Operation and Maintenance VCC Performance Statistics 9783 9788 9700 A2 GB20 20 Access Virtual Channel Connection VCC statistics from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics VCC ATM link Net1 ATM must be enabled and have at least one VCC for these statistics to appear Select a VPI VCI Format VPI VCI Netn FRn DLC m VPI 0 15 VCI 32 255 m Netn FRn frame relay link m 16 1007 DLCI number Table 7 18 VCC Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates VCC Virtual Channel Connection Tx Cells Number of cells transmitted on the link for the VCC Rx Cells Number of cells received on the link for the VCC Tx PDUs Number of AAL5 Common Part Convergence Sublayer CPCS Protocol Data Units PDUs received from a higher layer for transmission Rx PDUs Number of AAL5 PDUs received and passed to a higher l

Paradyne 9720 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents